Download - Fiat Linea T-Jet
Dear Customer,
Thank you for selecting Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Linea.
We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your car and use it in the best possible way.
You should read it right through before taking the road for the first time.
You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you derive the maximum from thetechnological features of your Fiat.
You are recommended to read carefully the warnings and indications, marked with the respective symbols:
personal safety;
the car’s wellbeing;
environmental protection.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers:
❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity
❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers.
Best regards and happy motoring!
This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Linea versions. As a consequence, you should consider only the information which is related to the engine and
bodywork version of the car you purchased.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 1
MUST BE READ!
�
K
REFUELLING
petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95 conforming to the European specification EN 228.
Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently cause lapse of warranty in relation to the damage caused.
ENGINE STARTING
petrol engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral; fully depress the clutchwithout pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVVand release it as soon as the engine has started.
Diesel engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral; fully depress the clutchwithout pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the warning lights Y and mto go off; turn the ignition key to AVVand release it as soon as the engine has started.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
The catalytic converter develops high temperature during operation. Do not park on grass, dry leaves, pine needlesor other flammable material: fire risk .
RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
The car is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to ensure better respect for the environment.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 2
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), visit a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support the required load.
CODE card
Keep it in a safe place, non in the car. Make sure you have the electronic code with you at all times.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.
THE OWNER’S MANUAL CONTAINS…
... important information, advise and warnings for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of your car in time.Pay special attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) ! (car’s wellbeing).
�
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 3
4
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
DASHBOARD........................................................................ 5
SYMBOLS ............................................................................... 6
THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM.................................................. 6
THE KEYS .............................................................................. 8
ALARM ................................................................................... 11
IGNITION DEVICE .............................................................. 13
INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................ 14
INSTRUMENTS ..................................................................... 16
DIGITAL DISPLAY ............................................................... 18
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ............................................ 23
RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ....... 32
TRIP COMPUTER ................................................................ 42
FRONT SEATS ..................................................................... 44
REAR SEATS .......................................................................... 45
HEAD RESTRAINTS............................................................. 45
STEERING WHEEL .............................................................. 47
REARVIEW MIRRORS ......................................................... 47
HEATING AND VENTILATION ...................................... 49
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM .................... 53
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ............ 59
EXTERNAL LIGHTS ............................................................ 66
WINDOW WASHING ....................................................... 68
CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................ 70
CEILING LIGHTS .................................................................. 72
CONTROLS........................................................................... 75
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH .................................................. 77
INTERIOR FITTINGS........................................................... 78
DOORS .................................................................................. 82
POWER WINDOWS........................................................... 83
BOOT ...................................................................................... 86
BONNET................................................................................. 88
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK .................................................... 90
HEADLIGHTS ........................................................................ 91
ABS SYSTEM ......................................................................... 92
ESP SYSTEM .......................................................................... 93
EOBD SYSTEM ..................................................................... 96
PARKING SENSORS ........................................................... 97
SOUND SYSTEM .................................................................. 99
ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER.......... 100
AT THE FILLING STATION ............................................. 101
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT............................. 102
DDDDAAAASSSSHHHHBBBBOOOOAAAARRRRDDDD AAAANNNNDDDD CCCCOOOONNNNTTTTRRRROOOOLLLLSSSS
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 4
5
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSDASHBOARD
The presence and position of the controls, the instruments and the indicators may vary according to the versions.
1. Adjustable side air vents - 2. Fixed side air vents - 3. Left stalk: external lights control - 4. Instrument panel - 5. Right stalk: windscreen wiper controls, trip computer - 6. Controls on dashboard - 7. Adjustable central air vents - 8. Fixed up-per air vent - 9. Front airbag - passenger side - 10. Oddment compartment - 11. Sound system (where provided) - 12. HVACcontrols - 13. Ignition device - 14. Front airbag - driver’s side - 15. Steering wheel adjustment lever - 16. Control panel: foglights/rear fog light/headlight position adjustment/digital display/multifunctional display.
F0R0001m
fig. 1
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 5
6
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS SYMBOLS
Special coloured labels have been attachednear or actually on some of the compo-nents of your car. These labels bear sym-bols that remind you of the precautionsto be taken as regards that particular com-ponent.
The plate summarising the symbols usedcan be found under the bonnet fig. 1.
THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM
This is an electrical engine locking systemwhich increases protection from at-tempted theft of the car. It is automaticallyactivated when the ignition key is ex-tracted.
Each key contains an electronic devicewhich modulates the signal emitted dur-ing ignition by an antenna incorporated inthe ignition device. This signal is the ‘pass-word’ which changes at each ignition andwhich the control unit uses to recognisethe key and allow ignition.
fig. 1 F0R0002m
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 6
7
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSIn this case, turn the key to STOP and
then back to MAR; try with the otherkeys provided if the problem persists.Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still can-not start the engine.
IMPORTANT Each key has its own codewhich must be stored by the system ECU.Contact a Fiat Dealership to have newkeys (up to eight) stored.
Warning light Ycoming on when driving
❒ If the warning light Y turns on, thismeans that the system is running a self-test (for example for a voltage drop).
❒ If the warning light Y stays on, con-tact a Fiat Dealership.
The electronic componentsinside the key may be dam-aged if the key is submitted tosharp knocks.
OPERATION
Each time the car is started turning the ig-nition key to MAR, the Fiat CODE sys-tem control unit sends a recognition codeto the engine control unit to deactivatethe inhibitor.
The code is sent only if the Fiat CODEsystem control unit has recognised thecode transmitted from the key.
Each time the ignition key is turned toSTOP, the Fiat CODE system deactivatesthe functions of the engine electronic con-trol unit.
If the code has not been recognised cor-rectly, the warning light Y turns on ac-companied by the related message on thedisplay (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 7
8
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROLfig. 3
The metal insert A is retractable and it op-erates:
❒ the ignition switch;
❒ the door locks;
❒ the fuel filler lock (where provided).
To extract the metal insert, press buttonB.
THE KEYS
CODE CARD fig. 2(Optional for versions/marketswhere applicable)
The car is delivered with two copies of theignition key and with the CODE cardwhich bears the following:
A the electronic code;
B the mechanical key code to be givento the Fiat Dealership when orderingduplicate keys.
Make sure you have the electronic codeA-fig. 2 with you at all times.
IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfectefficiency of the electronic devices con-tained inside the keys, they should neverbe exposed to direct sunlight.
All the keys and the CODEcard must be handed over tothe new owner when sellingthe car.
fig. 2 F0R0003m fig. 3 F0R0004m
fig. 4 F0R0005m
To refit it proceed as follows:
❒ keep button B pressed and move themetal insert A;
❒ release button B and turn the metal in-sert A until hearing the proper lock-ing click.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 8
9
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSButton Ë is used for opening the doors
and the tailgate.
Button Á is used for locking the doors andthe tailgate.
Button R (present in some versions on-ly) is used for remote opening of the tail-gate.
The passenger’s compartment lights willcome on for a preset time when the doorsare unlocked.
Only press button B with thekey away from your body,
specifically from your eyes and fromobjects which could get damaged (e.g.your clothes). Do not leave the keyunattended to avoid the button frombeing accidentally pressed while it isbeing handled, e.g. by a child.
WARNING
LED indications on the driver’sdoor fig. 5
When locking the doors, led A switcheson for about 3 seconds and than startsflashing (deterrence function).
If one or more doors or the tailgate arenot closed correctly when the doors arelocked, the led and direction indicatorsstart flashing quickly. The operation willnot be completed.
fig. 5 F0R0006m
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 9
10
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
Replacing the battery of the keywith remote control fig. 6
Battery replacement:
❒ press button A and open the metal in-sert B;
❒ turn the screw C to : using a fine bitscrewdriver;
❒ take out the battery case D and replacethe battery E making sure that the biasis correct;
❒ refit the battery case D inside the keyand lock it turning the screw C to Á
Used batteries are harmful tothe environment. They shouldbe disposed of as specified bylaw in the special containers
provided, or take them to a Fiat Deal-ership, which will deal with their dis-posal.
fig. 6 F0R0007m
Request for additional remotecontrols
The system may recognise up to 8 remotecontrols. Should a new remote control benecessary, contact a Fiat Dealership, tak-ing with you the CODE card, a personalidentity document and the car’s owner-ship documents.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 10
11
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSHEADLIGHT WASHER
(where provided) fig. 7
The metal insert of the key A is fixed.
The key operates:
❒ the ignition switch;
❒ the door locks;
❒ the fuel filler lock (where provided).fig. 7 F0R0008m
ALARM
The car alarm system is available at Lin-eaccessori Fiat.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 11
12
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
Type
Key without remote control
Key with remote control
Direction indicatorsflashing (only with key with remote control)
Deterrence led
The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:
Unlocking the doors
Turn key anticlockwise (driver’s side)
Turn key anticlockwise (driver’s side)
Press briefly Ë
blinks twice
Off
Locking the doors from the outside
Turn key clockwise (driver’s side)
Turn key clockwise (driver’s side)
Briefly press Á
blinks once
Steady for approximately 3 seconds and then deterrent blinking
Unlocking thetailgate
–
–
Briefly press R
blinks twice
Deterrent blinking
IMPORTANT The windows will be opened when the doors are unlocked; the windows will be closed when the doors arelocked.
Windows down (where provided)
–
–
Hold pressed Ë(for longer than 2 seconds)
blinks twice
Off
Windows up (where provided)
–
–
Hold pressed button Á(for longer than seconds)
blinks once
Deterrence led blinks
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 12
13
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSIGNITION
DEVICE
The key can be turned to 3 different po-sitions fig. 8:
❒ STOP: engine off, key extractable,steering locked. Some electrical devices(e.g. sound system, central door lock-ing system, etc.) may work.
❒ MAR: driving position. All electrical de-vices may work.
❒ AVV: engine starting (unstable posi-tion).
The ignition switch is fitted with an elec-tronic safety system that, in the event theengine is not started, turns back the igni-tion key to STOP before repeating thestarting operation.
STEERING COLUMN LOCK
Engaging
When the key is at STOP, remove thekey and turn the steering wheel until itlocks.
Disengaging
Rock the steering wheel slightly as youturn the ignition key to MAR.
If the ignition device is tam-pered with (e.g.: attempted
theft), have it checked over by a FiatDealership as soon as possible.
WARNING
Always remove the key whenyou leave your car to pre-
vent someone from accidentally op-erating the controls. Remember toapply the handbrake. Engage firstgear if the car is parked uphill or re-verse if the car is parked downhill.Never leave children unattended inthe car.
WARNING
fig. 8 F0R0009m
Never extract the key whilethe vehicle is moving. The
steering wheel would be locked assoon as the steering wheel is turned.This also applies to when the car istowed.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out whatever after-
market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifica-tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theftdevice) that could badly affect per-formance and safety, cause the lapseof warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with homolo-gation requirements.
WARNING
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 13
14
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS INSTRUMENT PANEL
Versions with digital display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight
C Engine coolant temperature gauge andexcessive temperature warning light
D Rev counter
E Digital display
Versions with multifunction display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight
C Engine coolant temperature gauge andexcessive temperature warning light
D Rev counter
E Multifunction display
F0R0010mfig. 9
F0R0011mfig. 10
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 14
15
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
Versions with reconfigurablemultifunction display
A Speedometer (speed indicator)
B Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight
C Engine coolant temperature gauge andexcessive temperature warning light
D Rev counter
E Reconfigurable multifunction display
F0R0215mfig. 11
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 15
16
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS INSTRUMENTS
Instrument background colour and typemay vary according to the version.
SPEEDOMETER fig. 12
It shows the car speed.
REV. COUNTER fig. 13
Rev counter shows engine rpm.
IMPORTANT The electronic injectioncontrol system gradually shuts off the flowof fuel when the engine is ‘over-revving’resulting in a gradual loss of engine pow-er.
When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden increaseof the speed.
This is normal and does not indicate afault. It may be caused, for example, by theoperation of the climate control systemor fan. In these case, a slow change in en-gine speed is used to protect the batterycharge.
fig. 12 F0R0012m fig. 13 F0R0013m
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 16
17
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE fig. 14
This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.
E empty tank(see “At the filling station”).
F full tank.
The reserve warning light A turns on toindicate that approximately 7 litres of fu-el are left in the tank.
Do not travel with the tank nearly empty:lack of fuel supply could damage the catal-yser.
IMPORTANT The needle will point to Eand warning light A will blink to indicate afault in the system. Go to a Fiat Dealer-ship to have the system checked.
ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE fig. 15
This shows the temperature of the enginecoolant fluid and begins working when thefluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.
Under normal conditions, the needleshould hover around the middle of thescale according to the working conditions.
C Low engine coolant temperature.
H High engine coolant temperature.
Warning light B may light up (and a mes-sage on the multifunctional display may ap-pear in certain versions) to indicate thatthe coolant fluid temperature is too high;in this case, stop the engine and contacta Fiat Dealership.
fig. 14 F0R0014m fig. 15 F0R0015m If the needle reaches the redarea, stop the engine imme-diately and contact a FiatDealership.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 17
18
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS DIGITAL DISPLAY
STANDARD SCREEN fig. 16
The standard screen shows the followingindications:
A Headlight aiming position (only withdipped beam headlights on).
B Clock (always displayed, even with ig-nition key removed and front doorsclosed).
C Odometer (distance covered in kilo-metres or miles) and TRIP data.
Note With key removed (when openingone of the front doors) the display willturn on and show for a few seconds thekm or mi covered.
CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 17
+ To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options upwards or to in-crease the value displayed.
MENUESC
Press briefly to access the menuand/or go to next screen or toconfirm the required menu op-tion.Hold pressed to go back to thestandard screen.
– To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options downwards or to de-crease the displayed value.
Note Buttons + and – activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations:
To adjust light inside the passenger compartment
– standard screen, to adjust instrumentpanel brightness, sound system, and auto-matic climate control system.
Setup menu
– to scroll the menu options upwards anddownwards;– to increase or decrease values during set-tings.
fig. 16 F0R0016m fig. 17 F0R0017m
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 18
19
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSSETUP MENU fig. 18
The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a cycle which can be selectedthrough buttons + and – to access the dif-ferent select operations and settings (set-up) given in the following paragraphs.
The setup menu can be activated by press-ing briefly button MENU ESC.
Single presses on buttons + and – willscroll the setup menu options.
Handling modes differ with each other ac-cording to the characteristic of the optionselected.
Selecting a menu option
– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the menu option to set;
– press buttons + and – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;
– press briefly button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe previously selected menu option.
Selecting “Set Clock”
– briefly press button MENU ESC to se-lect the first value to change (hours);
– press buttons + and – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go to thenext setup menu option (minutes);
– after setting the values with the sameprocedure, the system will go back to themenu option previously selected.
Hold button MENU ESC pressed
– to quit the set up menu if you are in themenu;– to quit the displayed menu if you are set-ting an option;– to save only the settings stored yet (andconfirmed by pressing button MENUESC).
The setup menu displaying is timed; whenquitting the menu due to timing expiry, on-ly settings stored yet by the user (and con-firmed by pressing briefly button MENUESC).
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 19
20
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
Briefly press button MENU ESC to start browsingfrom the standard screen. Press + or – to browse with-in the menu.Note Only the short menu may be accessed for rea-sons of safety while the car is moving (“SPEEd” setting).Stop the car to access the full menu.
fig. 18
F0R2003g
+
–
+– +
–
+–
+
–
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 20
21
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSSetting the speed limit (SPEEd)
This function may be used to set the carspeed limit (km/h or mph), when this lim-it is exceeded the driver is immediatelyalerted (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC, themessage (SPEEd) and the previously setunit (km/h) or (mph) will appear on thedisplay;
– press button + or – to activate (on) ordeactivate (OFF) the speed limit function;
– if the function is on, press buttons + or– to select the required speed limit andthen press MENU ESC to confirm;
Note The speed may be set in the rangefrom 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125mph according to the previously chosenunit (see “Setting the distance unit”) de-scribed below. The setting will in-crease/decrease by five units each timebutton +/– is pressed. Hold button +/–pressed to increase/decrease the settingrapidly. Complete the setting by brieflypressing the button when you approachthe required setting.
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.To cancelthe setting, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)will blink on the display;
– press button –: (Off) will blink on thedisplay;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Setting the clock (Hour)
This function is used to set the clock.
Proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC,“hours” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC, “min-utes” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Adjusting the buzzer volume(bUZZ)
This function is used to adjust the buzzervolume used for failure/warning indica-tions and when MENU ESC, + and –buttons are pressed.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the wording (bUZZ);
– press button + or – to select the re-quired volume (volume can be adjusted ac-cording to 8 levels).
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 21
22
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS Front passenger’s airbag
and side bagactivation/deactivation (where provided) (BAG P)
This function is used to activate/deactivatethe front passenger’s airbag.
Proceed as follows:
❒ press button MENU ESC and afterthe message (BAG P OFF) (to deacti-vate) or (BAG P On) (to activate) is dis-played by pressing buttons + or –, pressagain button MENU ESC;
❒ the confirmation request message willbe displayed;
❒ press buttons + or – to select (YES)(confirming activation/deactivation) or(no) (to abort);
❒ briefly press button MENU ESC toconfirm setting e to go back to themenu screen or press the button forlong to go back to the standard screenwithout storing settings.
MENU ESC
MENU ESC
MENU ESC
–+
–+
–+
–+
F0R
1001
g
F0R
1003
g
F0R
1002
gF0
R10
05i
F0R
1006
g
F0R
1002
g
F0R
1003
g
Setting the distance unit (Unit)
With this function it is possible to set theunit.
To set the required unit proceed as fol-lows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the message (Unit) andthe previously set unit (km) or (mi);
– press button + or – to select the re-quired distance unit.
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 22
23
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 21
+ To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options upwards or to in-crease the value displayed.
MENUESC
Press briefly to access the menuand/or go to next screen or toconfirm the required menu op-tion.Hold pressed to go back to thestandard screen.
– To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options downwards or to de-crease the value displayed.
MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY(where provided)
The car can be equipped with the multi-functional display that, according to thesettings made, will show useful informa-tion necessary when driving.
“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 20The standard screen shows the followinginformation:A Date.B Odometer (covered km or miles).C Clock (always displayed, even with ig-
nition key removed and front doorsclosed).
D External temperature.E Headlight aiming position (only with
dipped beam headlights on).Note When opening one of the frontdoors, the display will turn on and showfor a few seconds the clock and the kilo-metres or miles covered.
fig. 20 F0R0018m
Note Buttons + and – activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations:
To adjust light inside the passenger compartment
– standard screen, to adjust instrumentpanel brightness, sound system, and auto-matic climate control system.
Setup menu
– to scroll the menu options upwards anddownwards;– to increase or decrease values during set-tings.
fig. 21 F0R0019m
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 23
24
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS SETUP MENU fig. 22
The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a cycle which can be selectedthrough buttons + and – to access the dif-ferent select operations and settings (set-up) given in the following paragraphs. Asubmenu is provided for some items(Clock and Unit setting).The setup menu can be activated by press-ing briefly button MENU ESC.Single presses on buttons + or – will scrollthe setup menu options.Handling modes differ with each other ac-cording to the characteristic of the optionselected.
Selecting an option of the main menu with-out submenu
– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the main menu option to set;– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;– press briefly button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe main menu option previously select-ed.
Selecting “Set Date” and “Set time”:
– briefly press button MENU ESC to se-lect the first value to change (e.g. hours/minutes or year / month / day);– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC to storethe new setting and to go to the next set-up menu option, if this is the last one youwill go back to the previously selected op-tion of the main menu.
Hold button MENU ESC pressed:
– to quit the set-up menu if you are in themain menu;– to quit the main menu if you are at an-other point of the menu (e.g.: at submenuoption setting level, at submenu level orat main menu option setting level);– to save only the settings stored yet (andconfirmed by pressing button MENUESC).The setup menu environment is timed.Only the changes saved by the user bbriefly pressing MENU ESC will be savedwhen the menu is automatically closed.
Selecting an option of the main menu withsubmenu:
– briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play the first submenu option;– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to scroll all the submenu options;– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the displayed submenu option and toopen the relevant setup menu;– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting for this sub-menu option;– briefly press button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe previously selected submenu option.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 24
25
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
Day
Year Month
Türk Nederlands
Español
Português
Français
Italiano
Deutsch Polski
English
Example:
fig. 21
Example:
Briefly press MENU ESC on the standard screen tobrowse. Press + or – to browse within the menu.Note Only the short menu may be accessed for rea-sons of safety while the car is moving (“Speed Beep”setting). Stop the car to access the full menu.
F0R2004g
ESCMENU briefly press
+
–
EXIT MENU
SPEED BEEP RAIN SENSOR (where provided )
SET TIME
SET DATE
SEE RADIO
AUTOCLOSE
UNIT UNIT LANGUAGE
WARNING VOLUME
BUTTON VOLUME
BELT BUZZER (*)
SERVICE
PASSENGER BAG
(*) This function may only be displayed after the SBR system is deactivated by a Fiat Dealership.
TRIP B DATA
ESCMENUbriefly press HEADLIGHTS
SENSOR (where provided)
+–
+–
+–
+–
+–
+–
+–
+–+
–+
–
+–
+–
+–
+–
+–
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 25
26
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)will blink on the display;
– press button –: (Off) will flash on the dis-play;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Rain sensor sensitivity adjustment(Rain sensor) (where provided)
With this function it is possible to adjustthe rain sensor sensitivity according to 4levels.
To set the required sensitivity level pro-ceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC, thepreviously set sensitivity “level” will flashon the display;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Speed limit (Speed Beep)
This function may be used to set the carspeed limit (km/h or mph); when this lim-it is exceeded the driver is immediatelyalerted (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the wording (SpeedBuzz); – press button + or – to select speed lim-it activation (On) or deactivation (Off);– if the function has been activated (On),press buttons + or – to select the re-quired speed limit and then press MENUESC to confirm.Note The speed may be set in the rangefrom 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125 mphaccording to the previously chosen unit (see“Setting the distance unit”) described below.The setting will increase/decrease by fiveunits each time button +/– is pressed. Holdbutton +/– pressed to increase/decrease thesetting rapidly. Complete the setting bybriefly pressing the button when you ap-proach the required setting.– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Headlight sensor (Automatic headlight sensorsensitivity adjustment) (where provided)
This function is used to adjust the dusk sensor sensitivity to three levels (level 1 = minimum, level 2 = medium, lev-el 3 = maximum); higher the sensitivity,lower the quantity of external light need-ed to switch the headlights on.
Proceed as follows to set:
– briefly press button MENU ESC, thepreviously set level will flash on the dis-play;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 26
27
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSTrip B On/Off (tripB data)
Through this option it is possible to acti-vate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B(partial trip).
For further information see “Trip com-puter”.
Proceed as follows to switch the functionon and off:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Setting the clock (Set time)This function allows to set the clock throughtwo sub-menus: “Time” and “Mode”.Proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the two sub-menus“Time” and “Mode”;– press button + or – to surf the two sub-menus;– select the required option and thenpress button MENU ESCbriefly;– when accessing the “Hour” submenu: –briefly press button MENU ESC,“hours” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC, “min-utes” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– when accessing the “Format” submenu:briefly press button MENU ESC : thepreviously set display format will flash onthe display;– press button + or – to select “24h” or“12h”.
When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESCto go back to the menu screen or pressthe button for long to go back to the stan-dard screen without storing settings. – hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.
Set date (Set Date)This function may be used to update thedate (year - month - day).To correct the date proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC: “day”will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC:“month” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC:“year” will flash on the display;
– press button + or – for setting.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 27
28
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS – press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Automatic door locking with carrunning (Autoclose)
When activated (On), this function locksautomatically the doors when the carspeed exceeds 20 km/h.
This function is available on all versionsand may only be switched off by meansof the multifunctional display or reconfig-urable multifunctional display.
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) thisfunction proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play the three sub-menus;
– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or press the
Note The setting will increase or de-crease by one unit each time + or – ispressed. Hold the button pressed to in-crease/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-plete the setting by briefly pressing thebutton when you approach the requiredsetting.– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Audio repetition (See radio)With this function the display repeats in-formation relevant to the sound system.– Radio: tuned radio station frequency orRDS message, automatic tuning activationor AutoSTore;– CD audio, CD MP3: track number;– CD Changer: CD number and tracknumber;To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off)sound system info displaying proceed asfollows:– briefly press MENU ESC: (On) or (Off)will flash on the display (according to pre-vious setting);
button for long to go back to the stan-dard screen without storing settings.– hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.
Set units (Unit of measure)
With this function it is possible to set theunits through three sub-menus: “Distances”,“Consumption” and “Temperature”.
Proceed as follows to set the required unit:
– briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play the three sub-menus;
– press button + or – to surf the three sub-menus;
– select the required sub-menu and thenpress briefly button MENU ESC;
– when accessing the “Distances”submenu:briefly press MENU ESC: either “km” or“mi” will appear on the display (accordingto the previous setting);
– press + or – to make your choice;
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 28
29
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSSelecting the language (Language)
The messages may be displayed in the fol-lowing languages: Italian, Turkish, Dutch,Portuguese, Polish, French, Spanish, Eng-lish, German.
To set the required language proceed asfollows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set “language” “ will flash on thedisplay;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
– when you are in the “Consumption” sub-menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either“km/l” or “mpg” will appear on the display(according to the previous setting);
If the distance unit set is “km” the fuel con-sumption unit will be displayed in km.
If the distance unit set is “mi” the fuel con-sumption unit will be displayed in “mpg”.
– press button + or – for setting;
– when accessing the “Temperature”sub-menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either“°C” or “°F” will appear on the display (ac-cording to the previous setting);
– press button + or – for setting;When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or press thebutton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings. – hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.
Adjusting the failure/warningbuzzer volume (Buzzer Volume)
With this function the volume of thebuzzer accompanying any failure/warningindication can be adjusted according to 8levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set volume “level” will flash onthe display;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 29
30
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS Scheduled Servicing (Service)
Through this function it is possible to dis-play information connected to proper carservicing.
Proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: ser-vice in km or mi, according to previoussetting, will be displayed (see paragraph“Units”);
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen.
Note The “Service Schedule” requires thecar to be serviced every 30,000 km (or18,000 mi) or every 20,000 km (whereprovided); this indication will appear au-tomatically with the key at MAR whenthere are 2000 km left (or 1240 mi) andwill be presented automatically every 200km (or 124 mi). The indications will ap-pear more frequently where there are 200km left. The indication will appear in kilo-metres or miles according to the settings.When the next scheduled service opera-tion is approaching, the message “Service”will appear on the display followed by thenumber of kilometres or miles left whenthe key is turned to MAR. Go to a FiatDealership where the “Scheduled Service”operations will be performed and the mes-sage will be reset.
Adjusting the button volume (Button Vol.)
This function may be used to adjust thevolume of the beep accompanying the ac-tivation of buttons MENU ESC, + and– can be adjusted according to 8 levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set volume “level” will flash onthe display;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 30
31
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSPassenger front and side airbag
activation/deactivation (where provided) (passenger bag)
This function shall be used to activate/de-activate the front passenger’s airbag.
Proceed as follows:
❒ press button MENU ESC and pressMENU ESC again after the message(Bag pass: Off) (to deactivate) or (Bagpass: On) (to activate) is displayed bypressing buttons + and –;
❒ display will show the confirmation mes-sage;
❒ press buttons + or – to select (Yes)(confirming activation/deactivation) or(No) (to abort);
❒ briefly press button MENU ESC toconfirm setting e to go back to themenu screen or press the button forlong to go back to the standard screenwithout storing settings.
MENU ESC
MENU ESC
MENU ESC
–+
–+
–+
–+
–+
–+
F0R
1009
g
F0R
1011
g
F0R
1010
gF0
R10
13g
F0R
1014
g
F0R
1009
g
F0R
1009
g
MENU ESC
F0R
1015
g
F0R
1016
g
Exit Menu
This is the last function that closes the cir-cular setting cycle listed in the initial menuscreen.
Briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the standard screen without stor-ing settings.
Press button – to return to the first menuoption (Speed Beep).
001-031 LINEA 1ed GB 4-09-2008 14:55 Pagina 31
32
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS RECONFIGURABLE
MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY (where provided)
The car may be equipped with reconfig-urable a multifunctional display that, ac-cording to the settings made, will showuseful driving information.
“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 23/a
The standard screen shows the followinginformation:
A Time
B Date
C Sport driving mode indication (whereprovided)
D Odometer (distance travelled in kilo-metres/miles)
E Car conditions (e.g. doors open, ice onroad, etc.)
F Headlight aiming position (with dippedbeam headlights on only)
G Outside temperature
When rotating the ignition key to MARposition, the display shows, as mainscreen, the indication of the date fig.23/aor the overpressure of the turbo-charg-er fig.23/b according to the previous se-lection in the menu item “First screen”(“Date” or “Engine Info”).
CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 24
+ To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options upwards or to in-crease the displayed value.
MENU Press briefly to access the menuESC and/or go to next screen or to
confirm the required menu op-tion.Long press to go back to thestandard screen.
– To scroll the displayed menu and therelated options downwards or to de-crease the value displayed.
Note Buttons + and – activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations:
– to scroll the menu options upwards anddownwards;
– to increase or decrease values duringsettings.
Note When opening one of the frontdoors, the display will turn on and showfor a few seconds the clock and the km ormi covered.
fig. 24 F0R0019m
fig. 23/a F0R2010g fig. 23/b F0R0241m
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 32
33
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSSETUP MENU fig. 25
The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a “circular fashion” which canbe selected through buttons + and – toaccess the different select operations andsettings (setup) given in the following para-graphs. A submenu is provided for someitems (Clock and Unit setting).
The setup menu can be activated by press-ing briefly button MENU ESC.
Single presses on buttons + or – will scrollthe setup menu options. Managementmodes differ with each other according tothe characteristic of the option selected.
Selecting an option of the main menu without submenu
– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the main menu option to set;
– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting;
– press briefly button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe main menu option previously select-ed.
Selecting an option of the main menu withsubmenu:
– press briefly button MENU ESC to dis-play the first submenu option;
– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to scroll all the submenu options;
– press briefly button MENU ESC to se-lect the displayed submenu option and toopen the relevant setup menu;
– press buttons + or – (by single press-es) to select the new setting for this sub-menu option;
– press briefly button MENU ESC tostore the new setting and to go back tothe previously selected submenu option.
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 33
34
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS Example:
Day
Year Month Türk Nederlands
Español
Português
Français
Polski
Italiano
Deutsch
BELT BUZZER
RAIN SENSOR(where provided)
TRIP B DATA
SET DATE
FIRST PAGE
SEE RADIO
AUTOCLOSEUNIT LANGUAGE
BUZZER VOL.
BUTTON VOL.
MENU ESCbriefly press
MENU ESCbriefly press
fig. 25
SERVICE
F0R2005g
SET TIME
SPEED BEEP
EXIT MENU
PASSENGER BAG
English
On the standard screen, briefly press MENU ESC to start brows-ing. Press + or – to browse within the menu. Note Only the shortmenu may be accessed for reasons of safety while the car is moving(“Brightness” and “Speed Beep”). Stop the car to access the full menu.
HEADLIGHT SENSOR (where provided)
–
+
+ ++
+
+
+
+
+
+++
+
+
+
+
+
–––
–
–
–
–
–
––
––
–
–
–
–
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 34
35
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSNote The speed may be set in the range
from 30 to 200 km/h, or from 20 to 125mph according to the previously chosenunit (see “Setting the distance unit”) de-scribed below. The setting will in-crease/decrease by five units each timebutton +/– is pressed. Hold button +/–pressed to increase/decrease the settingrapidly. Complete the setting by brieflypressing the button when you approachthe required setting.
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)will blink on the display;
– press button –: (Off) will flash on the dis-play;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Speed beep (Speed limit)
This function is used to set the car speedlimit (km/h or mph); when this limit is ex-ceeded the driver is immediately alerted(see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”).
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the wording (SpeedBuzz);
– press button + or – to select speed lim-it activation (On) or deactivation (Off);
– if the function has been activated (On),press buttons + or – to select the re-quired speed limit and then press MENUESC to confirm.
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 35
36
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS Rain sensor sensitivity adjustment
(Rain sensor) (where provided)
With this function it is possible to adjustthe rain sensor sensitivity according to 4levels.To set the required sensitivity level pro-ceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thepreviously set sensitivity “level” will flashon the display;– press button + or – for setting; – briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Headlight sensor (Automatic headlight sensorsensitivity adjustment) (where provided)
This function is used to adjust the dusksensor sensitivity to three levels (level 1= minimum, level 2 = medium, level 3 =maximum); higher the sensitivity, lowerthe quantity of external light needed toswitch the headlights on. Proceed as fol-lows to set:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thepreviously set level will flash on the dis-play;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Trip B data (Trip B on)
This function may be used to activate (On)or deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip).
For further information see “Trip com-puter”.
Proceed as follows to switch the functionon and off:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Setting the time (Clock)
This function allows to set the clockthrough two sub-menus: “Time” and“Mode”.Proceed as follows:– briefly press button MENU ESC, thedisplay will show the two submenus“Time” and “Mode”;– press button + or – to switch betweenthe two submenus;– select the required option and thenpress button MENU ESCbriefly;- when accessing the “Time” submenu: –briefly press button MENU ESC,“hours” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting;– briefly press button MENU ESC, “min-utes” will flash on the display;– press button + or – for setting.
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 36
37
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSNote The setting will increase or de-
crease by one unit each time + or – ispressed. Hold the button pressed to in-crease/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-plete the setting by briefly pressing thebutton when you approach the requiredsetting.– when accessing the “Format” submenu:briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set display format will flash onthe display;– press button + or – to select “24h” or“12h”.
When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or press thebutton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
– hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.
Set date (Set Date)
This function may be used to update thedate (year - month - day).
To correct the date proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC:“year” will flash on the display;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC:“month” will flash on the display;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC: “day”will flash on the display;
– press button + or – for setting.
Note The setting will increase or de-crease by one unit each time + or – ispressed. Hold the button pressed to in-crease/decrease the setting rapidly. Com-plete the setting by briefly pressing thebutton when you approach the requiredsetting.
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
First screen (information displayedin the main screen) (where provided)
This function enables to select the type ofinformation displayed in the main screen.It is possible to display the date or thepressure of the turbo-compressor.
To select one of the two items, proceedas follows:
– push the button MENU ESC for ashort time, “First screen” is displayed;
– press again the button MENU ESC fora short time to display the “Date” and“Engine Info” options;
– press + or – to select the type of infor-mation to be displayed in the main screen;
– press MENU ESC for a short time tostore the selection and return to the pre-vious screen or press the button for alonger time to return to the standardscreen without storing the selection.
Rotating the ignition key on MAR, the re-configurable multifunctional display, afterthe start-up check, displays the previous-ly set information using the “First screen”function of the menu.
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 37
38
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS See radio
(Repeat audio information)
This function is used to display informa-tion relevant to the sound system.
– Radio: tuned radio station frequency orRDS message, automatic tuning activationor AutoSTore;
– CD audio, CD MP3: track number;
– CD Changer: CD number and tracknumber;
To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off)sound system info displaying proceed asfollows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Autoclose (Automatic door lock operationwith car running)
When activated (On), this function locksautomatically the doors when the carspeed exceeds 20 km/h.
This function is available on all versionsand may only be switched off by meansof the multifunctional display or reconfig-urable multifunctional display.
Proceed as follows to switch this functionon or off:
- briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play a submenu;
– briefly press button MENU ESC: (On)or (Off) will flash on the display (accord-ing to previous setting);
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
– hold MENU ESC pressed to go back tothe standard screen or main menu accord-ing to the points of the menu where you areat.
Unit of measure (Set units)
This function may be used to set the unitfor measure in three submenus: “Dis-tances”, “Consumption” and “Tempera-ture”.
Proceed as follows to set the requiredunit:
– briefly press button MENU ESC to dis-play the three sub-menus;
– press button + or – to browse the threesubmenus;
– select the required submenu and thenpress briefly buttonMENU ESC;
– when accessing the “Distance” submenu:briefly press MENU ESC: either “km” or“mi” will appear on the display (accord-ing to the previous setting);
– press button + or – for setting;
– when accessing the “Consumption” sub-menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either“km/l”, “l/100km” or “mpg” will appear onthe display (according to the previous set-ting);
If the distance unit set is “km” the fuel con-sumption unit will be displayed in km/l orl/100km.
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 38
39
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSIf the distance unit set is “mi” the fuel con-
sumption unit will be displayed in “mpg”.
– press button + or – for setting;
– when accessing the “Temperature” sub-menu: briefly press MENU ESC: either“°C” or “°F” will appear on the display ac-cording to the previous setting;
– press button + or – for setting;
When you have made the required set-tings, briefly press button MENU ESC togo back to the menu screen or press thebutton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
– hold MENU ESC pressed to go backto the standard screen or main menu ac-cording to the points of the menu whereyou are at.
Language (Selecting the language)
The messages may be displayed in the fol-lowing languages: Italian, German, English, Spanish, French, Portuguese,Dutch.
To set the required language proceed asfollows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set “language” “ will flash on thedisplay;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Buzzer volume (Adjusting thefailure/warning buzzer volume)
With this function the volume of thebuzzer accompanying any failure/warningindication can be adjusted according to 8levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set volume “level” will flash onthe display;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 39
40
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS Button volume
(Button volume adjustment)
This function may be used to adjust thevolume of the beep accompanying the ac-tivation of buttons MENU ESC, + and– can be adjusted according to 8 levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: thepreviously set volume “level” will flash onthe display;
– press button + or – for setting;
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen without storing settings.
Belt buzzer (Buzzer activation for S.B.R. indication)
This function can be only displayed afterFiat Dealership has deactivated the S.B.R.system (see paragraph “S.B.R. system” insection “Safety devices”).
Service (Scheduled servicing)
This function may be used to display in-formation connected to proper car ser-vicing.
Proceed as follows:
– briefly press button MENU ESC: ser-vice in km or mi, according to previous set-ting, will be displayed (see paragraph“Units”);
– briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the menu screen or press the but-ton for long to go back to the standardscreen.
Note The “Service Schedule” requires thecar to be serviced every 30,000 km (or18,000 mi) or every 20,000 km (12,000 mi)(where provided); this indication will ap-pear automatically with the key at MARwhen there are 2000 km left (or equiva-lent distance in miles) and will be pre-sented automatically every 200 km (orequivalent distance in miles). The indica-tions will appear more frequently wherethere are 200 km left. The indication willappear in kilometres or miles according tothe settings. When the next scheduledservice operation is approaching, the mes-sage “Service” will appear on the displayfollowed by the number of kilometres ormiles left when the key is turned to MAR.Go to a Fiat Dealership where the “Sched-uled Service” operations will be per-formed and the message will be reset.
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 40
41
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSPassenger bag Front passenger’s
airbag and side bag activation/deactivation (where provided)
This function may be used to activate/de-activate the front passenger’s airbag.
Proceed as follows:
– press MENU ESC and press MENUESC again after displaying the message(Bag pass: Off, to deactivate) or (Bag pass:On, to activate) by means of buttons + and –;
– the confirmation request message willbe displayed;
– press buttons + or – to select (Yes) forconfirming activation/deactivation, or (No)to abort;
– briefly press MENU ESC to confirmsetting e to go back to the menu screenor press the button for long to go back tothe standard screen without storing set-tings.
MENU ESC
F0R
2006
gF0
R20
07g
+–
F0R
2008
g
MENU ESC+–
Exit Menu
This is the last function that closes the cir-cular setting cycle listed in the initial menuscreen.
Briefly press button MENU ESC to goback to the standard screen without stor-ing settings.
Press button – to return to the first menuoption (Speed Beep).
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 41
42
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS TRIP COMPUTER
General features
The “Trip computer” is used to display in-formation on car operation when the keyis turned to MAR. This function allows todefine two separate trips called “Trip A”and “Trip B” for monitoring the car’s“complete mission” in a reciprocally in-dependent manner.
Both functions are resettable (reset - startof new mission).
“Trip A” may be used to display the fig-ures relating to:
– Range
– Distance travelled
– Average consumption
– Instant consumption
– Average speed
– Travel time (driving time).
“Trip B”, available on multifunctional dis-play only, shall be used to display the fig-ures relating to:
– Trip distance B
– Average consumption B
– Average speed B
– Travel time B (driving time).
Note “Trip B” functions may be exclud-ed (see “Trip B on”). “Range” and “In-stantaneous consumption” cannot be re-set.
Values displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may betravelled with the fuel in the tank assuming that driving conditions will notchange. The message “——” will appearon the display in the following cases:
– range shorter than 50 km (or 30 mi)
– car left parked with engine running forlong.
Distance travelled
This indicates the distance covered fromthe start of the new mission.
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 42
43
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSAverage consumption
This indicates the average consumptionfrom the start of the new mission.
Instant consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. Thevalue is constantly updated. The message“----” will appear on the display if the car is parked with the engine run-ning.
Average speed
This shows the car average speed as afunction of the overall time elapsed sincethe start of the new mission.
Travel time
This value shows the time elapsed sincethe start of the new mission.
IMPORTANT If information is not avail-able, the message “----” will appear insteadof the Trip Computer values. Displayingof the values will be resumed when nor-mal operation is restored without reset-ting the values displayed before the prob-lem nor starting a new mission.
TRIP button fig. 26Button TRIP, set on the top of the rightsteering column stalk, shall be used (withignition key at MAR) to display and to re-set the previously described values to starta new mission:– briefly press to display the different val-ues– hold pressed to reset and then start anew mission.
New mission
Reset can be:– “manual” resetting by the user, by press-ing the relevant button;– “automatic” resetting, when the “Trip dis-tance” reaches 3999.9 km or 9999.9 km(according to the type of display) or whenthe “Travel time” reaches 99.59 (99 hoursand 59 minutes);
– after disconnecting/reconnecting thebattery.
IMPORTANT The reset operation in thepresence of the screens concerning the“Trip A” makes it possible to reset onlythe information associated with this func-tion.
IMPORTANT The reset operation in thepresence of the screens concerning the“Trip B” makes it possible to reset onlythe information associated with this func-tion.
Start of journey procedure
With ignition key at MAR, press and keepbutton TRIP pressed for over 2 secondsto reset.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function: hold MENUESC pressed for longer than 2 seconds.
fig. 26 F0R0020m
032-043 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:28 Pagina 43
44
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
The fabric upholstery of yourcar is designed to withstandthe normal wear and tear ofyour car for a long time. Some
precautions are however needed. Avoidprolonged rubbing against clothing ac-cessories, such as metal buckles, Velcrostrips and the like, which by applying ahigh pressure on the fabric in a smallarea could cause the breakage of somethreads and damage the upholstery.
Seat height adjustment (where provided) fig. 27
Move lever B upwards or downwards toachieve the required height.
IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-ried out only seated in the relevant seat.
FRONT SEATS
fig. 27 F0R0021m
All adjustments must bemade with the car stationary.
WARNING
Backwards/Forwards adjustmentfig. 27
Lift lever A and push the seat forwardsand backwards: your arms should rest onthe steering wheel rim while you are dri-ving.
After releasing the lever, al-ways check that the seat is
locked on the guides by trying tomove it backwards and forth. If it isnot locked, the seat may move unex-pectedly and make you loose controlof the car.
WARNING
For maximum safety, keepthe back of your seat up-
right, lean back into it and make surethe seat belt fits closely across yourchest and hips.
WARNING
Back rest angle adjustment fig. 27
Turn knob C.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 44
45
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
fig. 28 F0R0022m
Electric lumbar adjustment (where provided) fig. 28
For electric lumbar adjustment, use con-trols E.
The fabric upholstery of yourcar is designed to withstandthe normal wear and tear ofyour car for a long time.
Some precautions are however need-ed. Avoid prolonged rubbing againstclothing accessories, such as metalbuckles, Velcro strips and the like,which by applying a high pressure onthe fabric in a small area could causethe breakage of some threads anddamage the upholstery.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
FRONT fig. 29
On certain versions head restraints are ad-justable in height and they lock automati-cally in the required position.
To adjust head restraints proceed as fol-lows:
❒ upward adjustment: raise the head re-straint until you hear it click.
REAR SEATS
To folds the rear seats refer to paragraph“Extending the boot” in this section.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 45
46
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
❒ downward adjustment: press A andlower the head restraint.
To lift out front head restraints: press atthe same time buttons A and B set onboth sides and take them out.
REAR (where provided) fig. 30
To use the head restraint, raise it until hear-ing the click (position of use).
To bring it back to the original position(position of non use), press button A andpush the head restraint down into theback rest.
fig. 29 F0R0024m fig. 30 F0R0025m
To optimise head restraint protective ac-tion, adjust the seat back upright and keepyour head as close as possible to the headrestraint.
The head restraints must beadjusted so that they sup-
port your neck and not your head.Only in this way may they performtheir protective action.
WARNING
To lift out rear head restraints: press atthe same time buttons A and B set onboth sides and take them out.
IMPORTANT Rear seat passengers shallalways set the head restraints in the po-sition of use.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 46
47
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSREARVIEW MIRRORS
DRIVING MIRROR fig. 32
The mirror is fitted with a safety devicethat causes it to be released in the eventof a violent crash.
STEERING WHEEL
The driver can adjust the steering wheelposition both axially and in height.
Proceed as follows:
❒ release the lever A-fig. 31 pushing itforwards (position 2);
❒ adjust the steering wheel as required;
❒ lock the lever A pulling it towards thesteering wheel (position 1).
fig. 31 F0R0026m
Any adjustment of the steer-ing wheel position must be
carried out only with the car station-ary and the engine turned off.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out whatever after-
market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifica-tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theftdevice) that could badly affect per-formance and safety, cause the lapseof warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with homolo-gation requirements.
WARNING
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 47
48
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
DOOR MIRRORS
Electrical adjustment fig. 33
This operation is only possible with igni-tion key at MAR.
Proceed as follows:
❒ use switch B to select the mirror re-quired (left or right);
❒ to adjust the mirror move the switchC in the four directions;
Folding
When required (for example when themirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)it is possible to fold the mirror moving itfrom position 1-fig. 34 to position 2.
fig. 32 F0R0027m
fig. 33 F0R0028m
The mirror can be adjusted to two differ-ent positions (normal or antiglare) bymeans of the lever A.
Some versions fit an electrochromic mir-ror. Button ON/OFF on the lower partof the window is used to switch the elec-trochromic function on and off. Switch onto shade the mirror for daytime use.
When driving the mirrors shallalways be in position 1-fig. 34.
As the driver’s door mirror iscurved, it may slightly alter the
perception of distance.
WARNING
fig. 34 F0R0029m fig. 35 F0R0030m
Manual adjustment fig. 35
Use knob A-fig. 35 to adjust manually.
Demisting/defrosting (where provided)
Mirrors are fitted with resistors that willactivate when turning the heated rear win-dow on (by pressing button ().
IMPORTANT This function is timed andit will turn off automatically a few minuteslater.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 48
49
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
fig. 36
F0R0031m
HEATING AND VENTILATION
1. Upper fixed vent - 2. Adjustable central vents - 3. Fixed side vent - 4. Adjustable side vents - 5. Lower vents for front seats - 6. Lower side vents for rear seats - 7. Lower central vent for rear seats (where provided).
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 49
50
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
CONTROLS fig. 39
Air temperature knob A(mixing hot and cold air)
Red section = hot air
Blue section = cold air
Fan on/off and speed adjustmentknob B
p 0 = fan off
1-2-3 = ventilation speed
4 - = maximum fan speed
fig. 39 F0R0034m
fig. 37 F0R0032m
fig. 38 F0R0033m
ADJUSTABLE SIDE ANDCENTRAL VENTS fig. 37-38
A Fixed vent for side windows.
B Adjustable side vents.
C Adjustable central vents.
Vents A are fixed.
To use vents B and C, operate the rele-vant device to turn them as required.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 50
51
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSAir distribution knob C
¶ to convey air to the central and sidevents;
ß to warm the feet and convey coolerair to the dashboard vents, in inter-mediate temperature conditions;
© for heating when the outside temper-ature is very cold: for maximum airflow to feet;
® to warm the feet and demist the wind-screen at the same time;
- for quick windscreen demisting.
Air recirculation on/off slider D
Take the slider to position v to re-circulate internal air.
Take the slider to position ¶ to switchinternal air recirculation off.
FAST HEATING
For fast heating of the passenger com-partment, proceed as follows:
❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
❒ switch internal air recirculation on;
❒ turn knob C to ¶;
❒ knob B turned to 4 - (max. fanspeed).
Then use the controls to keep the re-quired comfort conditions and press but-ton D to ¶ to turn air recirculation off(button led off) and to prevent misting up.
IMPORTANT With cold engine, you haveto wait for a few minutes to let the sys-tem fluid reach the operating temperature.
VENTILATION
To ventilate the passenger’s compartmentproperly proceed as follows:
❒ knob A turned to blue section;
❒ switch internal air recirculation off;
❒ turn knob C to ¶;
❒ turn knob B to required speed.
WARMING THE PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
❒ turn knob C to the required position;
❒ turn knob B to required speed.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 51
52
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS FRONT WINDOW FAST
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING (WINDSCREENAND SIDE WINDOWS)
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
❒ switch internal air recirculation off;
❒ turn knob C to -;
❒ knob B turned to 4 - (max. fanspeed).
After demisting/defrosting, operate thecontrols to restore the required comfort.
Window demisting
In the event of considerable outside mois-ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-ferences in temperature inside and outsidethe passenger compartment, perform thefollowing preventive demisting procedure:
❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
❒ switch internal air recirculation off;
❒ turn knob C to -. Change it to posi-tion con ® if demisting is insufficient;
❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed. HEATED REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRRORDEMISTING/DEFROSTING (where provided) fig. 40
Press button A to start this function;when this function is on the button led ison.
This function is timed and it will turn offautomatically after 20 minutes. Press Aagain to switch it off before.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage thatmight cause it to stop working properly.
fig. 40 F0R0035m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 52
53
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSMANUAL CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM (where provided)
CONTROLS fig. 41
Air temperature knob A (mixing hot and cold air)
Red section = hot air
Blue section = cold air
Fan activation /speed adjustmentknob B
p 0 = fan off
1-2-3 = ventilation speed
4 - = maximum fan speed
INTERNAL AIRRECIRCULATION
Move slider D to position v to switchinternal air recirculation on.
It is advisable to switch internal air recir-culation on while standing in queues or intunnels to prevent the introduction of pol-luted air. Do not use the function for along time, particularly if there are manyoccupants on board, to prevent the win-dows from misting up.
IMPORTANT The inside air recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach the re-quired “heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster.
Do not use the air recirculation functionon rainy/cold days as it would consider-ably increase the possibility of the win-dows misting up.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 53
54
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
Air distribution knob C
¶ to convey air to the central and sidevents;
ß to warm the feet and convey coolerair to the dashboard vents, in inter-mediate temperature conditions;
© for heating when the outside temper-ature is very cold: for maximum airflow to feet;
Air recirculation on/off slider D
Take the slider to position v to recir-culate internal air.
Take the slider to position ¶to switchinternal air recirculation off.
Switching the climate controlsystem on and off
Press knob E- fig. 41 (LED on knob willlight up) to switch the climate control sys-tem on.
Press knob E again (LED on knob will gooff) to switch the climate control systemoff.
fig. 41 F0R0036m
® to warm the feet and at the same timedemist the windscreen;
- for quick windscreen demisting.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 54
55
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSVENTILATION
To ventilate the passenger’s compartmentproperly proceed as follows:
❒ knob A turned to blue section;
❒ switch internal air recirculation off;
❒ turn knob C to ¶;
❒ turn knob B to required speed.
CLIMATE CONTROL (cooling)
For fast cooling of the passenger com-partment, proceed as follows:
❒ knob A turned to blue section;
❒ switch internal air recirculation on;
❒ turn knob C to ¶;
❒ switch the climate control system onby pressing knob E: the LED on theknob will light up;
❒ turn knob B to 4- (maximum speedof fan).
Cooling adjustment
❒ turn knob A rightwards to increase thetemperature;
❒ switch internal air recirculation off;
❒ turn knob B to increase fan speed.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 55
56
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS WARMING THE PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
❒ turn knob C to the required symbol;
❒ turn knob B to required speed.
FAST HEATING
For fast heating of the passenger com-partment, proceed as follows:
❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
❒ switch internal air recirculation on;
❒ turn knob C to ©;
❒ knob B turned to 4 - (max. fanspeed).
Then adjust the controls to obtain the re-quired conditions of comfort and switchinternal air recirculation off.
IMPORTANT With cold engine, you haveto wait for a few minutes to let the sys-tem fluid reach the operating temperature.
FRONT WINDOW FASTDEMISTING/DEFROSTING(WINDSCREEN AND SIDEWINDOWS)
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
❒ turn knob B to 4 - (maximum fanspeed);
❒ turn knob C to -;
❒ switch internal air recirculation off.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 56
57
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSWindow demisting
In the event of considerable outside mois-ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-ferences in temperature inside and outsidethe passenger compartment, perform thefollowing preventive demisting procedure:
❒ turn knob A to the red sector;
❒ switch internal air recirculation off;
❒ turn knob C to - and change it backto ® if demisting does not improve;
❒ turn knob B to 2nd speed.
IMPORTANT The climate control systemis very useful to prevent window mistingup in presence of high humidity since itdries the air.
HEATED REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRROR DEMISTING/DEFROSTING (where provided)fig. 42
Press button A to start this function;when this function is on the button led ison.
This function is timed and it will turn offautomatically after 20 minutes. Press Aagain to switch it off before.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage thatmight cause it to stop working properly.
fig. 42 F0R0035m
After demisting/defrosting, operate thecontrols to restore the required comfort.
IMPORTANT The climate control systemis very useful for faster demisting becauseit dries the air. Adjust the controls as de-scribed above and press knob E to switchthe climate control system on: the LED onthe knob will light up.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 57
58
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS LOOKING AFTER THE SYSTEM
Run the climate control system for at least10 minutes every month during the win-ter. Have the system inspected at a FiatDealership before the summer.
The system uses R134a re-frigerant fluid which does notharm the environment in theevent of accidental leakage.
Never use R12 fluid which is not com-patible with the system components.
IMPORTANT The inside air recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach the re-quired “heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster.
Do not use the air recirculation functionon rainy/cold days as it would consider-ably increase the possibility of the win-dows misting inside.
AIR RECIRCULATION
Move slider D to position v to switchinternal air recirculation on.
It is advisable to switch internal air recir-culation on while standing in queues or intunnels to prevent the introduction of pol-luted air. Do not use the function for along time, particularly if there are manyoccupants on board, to prevent the win-dows from misting up.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 58
59
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSAUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM (where provided)
GENERAL
The automatic climate control system ad-justs the temperature, the quantity and thedistribution of the air in the passengercompartment. Temperature is controlledon the basis of an “equivalent tempera-ture” principle; in other words, the sys-tem continuously works to keep the com-fort level inside the car constant and tocompensate for possible variations of ex-ternal conditions, including sun radiationdetected by a specific sensor.
The automatically controlled parametersand functions are:
❒ air temperature at the vents;
❒ air distribution at the vents;
❒ fan speed (continuous air flow varia-tion);
❒ compressor fan on (for cooling/dehu-midifying the air);
❒ air recirculation.
All functions may be manually changed. Inorder words, you may select one or morefunctions and change the parameters asrequired. Automatic control of the man-ually changed functions will be suspended:the system will change override your set-tings only for safety related reasons (e.g.risk of misting up).
Manual selections will always have higherpriority over automatic settings and willbe stored until the user switches the sys-tem back to automatic control by press-ing AUTO expect for the cases in whichthe system will intervene for particular,safety-related reasons.
You can adjust one function automatical-ly and have the automatic system controlall the others.
The air temperature is always automati-cally controlled according to the temper-ature shown on the display (except forwhen the system is off or in certain con-ditions when the compressor is not run-ning).
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 59
60
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS The following parameters and functions
can be set or changed manually:
❒ air temperature;
❒ fan speed (continuous variation);
❒ air distribution setting to seven posi-tions;
❒ compressor enabling;
❒ fast defrosting/demisting;
❒ air recirculation;
❒ system off.
F Compressor enabling button.
G Air recirculation button.
H Fan speed buttons.
I Temperature adjustment knob.
fig. 43 F0R0148m
CONTROLS fig. 43
A AUTO button: automatic control ofall functions.
B Air distribution selection buttons.
C Display.
D MAX DEF function button.
E System off button.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 60
61
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSUSING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
The system can be started in differentways, but it is advisable to start by press-ing the AUTO button and then turningthe knobs to set the temperature requiredon the display.
The system will start running automaticallyin this way and the set comfortable tem-perature will be reached as quickly as pos-sible. The system will adjust the temper-ature, the quantity and the distribution ofthe air introduced into the passenger com-partment and will manage the recircula-tion function and the compressor.
Manual intervention is only required forthe following functions during fully auto-matic operation.
❒ T air recirculation, to keep thefunction always either on or off;
❒ Z to speed up demisting/defrosting ofwindscreen, rear window and exter-nal rearview mirrors;
During completely automatic system op-eration, you can vary the set temperature,the air distribution and the fan speed us-ing the corresponding buttons or knobsat any time: the system will automaticallychange settings to adapt to the new re-quest.
During fully automatic operation (FULLAUTO), the word FULL will disappearif the air distribution, air speed, compres-sor and/or recirculation settings arechanged. In this way, the functions willswitch from automatic to manual controluntil AUTO is pressed again. With on ormore manually set functions, the intro-duced air temperature is still managed au-tomatically by the system, except for whenthe compressor is off: in the case, the airintroduced into the passenger compart-ment cannot be cooler than the outsideair.
Air temperature adjustmentknob (I)
Turn the knob either clockwise or anti-clockwise to increase or lower the re-quested temperature in the passengercompartment. The set temperature isshown on the display.
Turn the knob either all to the right orall to the left to the extreme HI or LOposition to use the maximum heating ormaximum cooling functions:
❒ HI function (maximum heating):
select by turning the temperature knobclockwise over the maximum value (32 °C).
This function may be used to heat up thepassenger compartment exploiting thesystem potential to the maximum. In thiscondition, the system stop controllingtemperature automatically and sets airmixing to maximum heating. The air speedand distribution are fixed.
Specifically, if the heating fluid is not suffi-ciently warm, the fan will not start up atthe maximum speed immediately to limitintroducing excessively cool air into thepassenger compartment.
All manual settings will be allowed whenthis function is on.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 61
62
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS To switch the function off, simply turn the
temperature knob anticlockwise and setthe required temperature.
❒ LO function (maximum cooling):
select by turning the temperature knobanticlockwise under the minimum value(16 °C).
This function may be used to cool downthe passenger compartment exploiting thesystem potential to the maximum. In thiscondition, the system stop controllingtemperature automatically and sets airmixing to maximum cooling. The air speedand distribution are fixed. All manual set-tings will be allowed when this functionis on.
To switch the function off, simply turn thetemperature knob anticlockwise and setthe required temperature.
Air distribution buttons (B)
Press these buttons to manually set oneof the seven air distribution settings:
▲ Air flow to the windscreen and frontside window vents to demist or de-frost them.
˙ Air flow at central and side dashboardvents to ventilate the chest and theface during the hot season.
▼ Air flow to the front and rear foot wellvents. Thanks to the natural tenden-cy of hot air to spread upwards, thisdistribution pattern allows to warmthe passenger compartment up asquickly as possible, providing an im-mediate feeling of warmth.
˙▼
Air flow distributed between foot wellvents (hotter air) and central and sidedashboard vents (cooler air). This dis-tribution is particularly useful in springand autumn on a sunny day.
▲▼
Air flow distributed between foot wellvents and windscreen and front sidewindow defrosting/demisting vents.This allows an adequate warming ofthe passenger compartment and pre-vents the windows from misting up.
▲˙
Air flow distributed between wind-screen and front side window de-froster/demister and central and sidedashboard vents. This distribution al-lows to maintain good levels of com-fort and the passenger compartmentadequately cool (summer).
▲˙▼
Air flow distributed between wind-screen and front side window de-froster/demister and central and sidedashboard vents. This distribution al-lows adequate air diffusion and main-tains a good level of comfort both insummer and winter.
The set distribution is shown by the cor-responding LEDs on the selected buttons.
To restore automatic air distribution con-trol after a manual adjustment, press but-ton AUTO.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 62
63
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSFan speed adjusting buttons (H)
Press button H to increase or to decreasethe fan speed and therefore the amountof air admitted into the passenger com-partment, although keeping the requiredtemperature set.
The fan speed is shown by the lit bars onthe display:
❒ max fan speed = all bars lit;
❒ min fan speed = one bar lit.
The fan can be cut off only if the climatecontrol compressor has been switched off pressing button F-fig. 40.
IMPORTANT To restore automatic fanspeed control after a manual adjustment,press button AUTO.
IMPORTANT At high speeds, the dynamiceffect may increase the flow of air into thepassenger compartment which in this casewill not directly correspond to the fanspeed bar display.
AUTO (A) (automatic operation)
Press AUTO to make the system auto-matically adjust the quantity and distribu-tion of the air introduced into the pas-senger compartment. All previous manu-al settings will be cancelled.
The message FULL AUTO will appearon the front display in this condition.
By manually intervening on at least of thefunctions automatically managed by thesystem (air recirculation, fan speed orcompressor on/off), the word FULL willdisappear from the display indicating thatthe system is no longer automatically con-trolling all the functions (the temperaturewill still be controlled automatically by thesystem).
IMPORTANT Should the system (aftermanual settings) be no longer able toguarantee the required temperature setin the passenger compartment, the settemperature value will start flashing to in-dicate this condition, after one minute theAUTO message will turn off.
To restore system automatic control atany time, after one or more manual ad-justments, press button AUTO.
Air recirculation on/off button (G)
Air recirculation works according to thefollowing operating logics:
❒ override on (inside air recirculationalways on), indicated by the the LEDon button G and symbol T onthe display;
❒ override off (air recirculation alwaysoff and introduction of external air),indicated by the fact that the LED onthe button is off êis on the display.
These operating conditions are obtainedby pressing G in sequence.
IMPORTANT The inside air recircula-tion system makes it possible to reachthe required heating or cooling condi-tions faster.
It is however inadvisable to use it onrainy/cold days as it would considerablyincrease the possibility of the windowsmisting inside, especially if the climatecontrol compressor is off.
Recirculation is forced off (i.e. air isintroduced from the outside) when thethe outside temperature is cold to pre-vent misting up.
It is advisable not to use the air recircu-lation function when the outside tem-perature is low to prevent the windowsfrom rapidly misting up.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 63
64
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS Climate control compressor
enabling button (F)
Press √ to switch the climate controlcompressor off (if on). The icon on thedisplay will go out.Press the button when the LED is off torestore automatically system controland use of the compressor. The iconwill light up on the display in this case.
The system will switch recirculation offwhen the compressor is switched off toprevent misting up. Although the systemis capable of maintaining the required tem-perature, the word FULL will disappearfrom the display. If on the other hand thesystem cannot maintain the required tem-perature, the digits will blink and the wordAUTO will disappear.
IMPORTANT With the compressor off,it is not possible to introduced air coolerthan ambient temperature into the pas-senger compartment. Furthermore, incertain conditions, the windows couldmist up rapidly because the air is not de-humidified.The switching off of the climatecontrol compressor remains in storageeven when the engine has been stopped.
To restore automatic compressor control,press √ again (in this case, the system willonly work as a heater) or press AUTO.
With climate control compressor off, thefan speed can be set to zero manually (nobar shown).
With the compressor enabled and the en-gine started, the fan speed may be reducedto the minimum setting (only one barshown).
Fast window demisting/defrosting button (D)
Press this button: the climate control sys-tem will automatically switch on all thefunctions required for fast windscreen andfront side window demisting/defrosting,that is:
❒ switches on climate control compres-sor when climatic conditions are suit-able;
❒ air recirculation off;
❒ maximum air temperature HI on bothareas;
❒ operates proper fan speed accordingto engine coolant temperature to lim-it the flow into the passenger com-partment of air not warm enough todemist the windows;
❒ directs air flow to windscreen andfront side windows vents;
❒ heated rear window on.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 64
65
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSIMPORTANT The quick demisting/de-
frosting function will stay on for approxi-mately 3 minutes after the engine coolanttemperature is warm enough to ensurerapid window demisting.
When the function is on, the LED on therear window demister button will light upand the message FULL AUTO will goout on the display.
You may only adjust the fan speed andswitch the rear window demister off man-ually when this function is running.
To restore running operations before thisfunction was activated, press either but-ton B, air recirculation button G, com-pressor button F or button AUTO A.
Switching the system off (E)
Press E to switch the climate control sys-tem off. The display will go out as a con-sequence.
The following climate control conditionswill be established when the system is off:
❒ display off;
❒ temperature not shown;
❒ air recirculation on, passenger com-partment isolated from the outside(recirculation LED on);
❒ climate control compressor off;
❒ fan off.
Press AUTO to switch the automatic cli-mate control system back on.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 65
66
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS EXTERNAL LIGHTS
The left-hand stalk fig. 44/a operatesmost of the external lights.
The external lights can only be switchedon when the ignition key is at MAR.
The instrument panel and the variousdashboard controls will come on with theexternal lights.
LIGHTS OFF
Knurled ring turned to symbol O.
SIDELIGHTS - TAILLIGHTS
Turn the knurled ring to 6.
The warning light 3 on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS
Turn the knurled ring to 2.
The warning light 3 on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS
When the knurled ring is at 2, pull thelever towards the steering wheel (2nd un-stable position).
The warning light 1 1on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.
To turn the main beams off, pull again thelever towards the steering wheel (dippedbeams will turn on again).
FLASHING THE HEADLIGHTS
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(1st unstable position) regardless of the po-sition of the knurled ring. The warninglight 1 on the instrument cluster willcome on at the same time.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTSENSOR (day light sensor) fig. 44/b (where provided)
This sensor detects changes of externallights according to the sensitivity of thesetting: higher the sensitivity, lower theamount of external light needed to switchthe lights on. The sensitivity of the day lightsensor may be adjusted by means of the“Setup menu” on the instrument panel.
Activation
Turn the knurled ring to 2A . the side/tail-lights and dipped beam headlights areswitched on automatically according tothe external light.
The headlights can only be flashed with thesensor on.
fig. 44/a F0R0037m fig. 44/b F0R0238m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 66
67
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSDeactivation
The main beam headlights will go out fol-lowed after approximately 10 seconds bythe side/taillights when the sensor is de-activated.
The sensor cannot detect the presence offog: switch the lights on manually in thiscase.
DIRECTION INDICATORS fig. 45
Push the stalk to (stable) position:
❒ up (position 1): right-hand indicator;
❒ down (position 2): left-hand indicator;
Warning light Î or ¥will blink on the in-strument panel.
Indicators are switched off automaticallywhen the steering wheel is straightened.
If you want the indicator to flash briefly toshow that you are about to change lane,move the stalk up or down without click-ing into position (unstable position). Whenreleased the stalk will return to its homeposition.
“FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE
This function allows the illumination of thespace in front of the car for a preset pe-riod of time.
Activation
With the ignition key at STOP or re-moved, pull the left-hand stalk towards thesteering wheel within 2 minutes fromwhen the engine is turned off.
At each single movement of the stalk, thelights will remain on for an extra 30 sec-onds up to a maximum of 210 seconds;then the lights are switched off automati-cally.
Warning light 3 on the instrument pan-el will light up and the corresponding mes-sage will appear on the display (see“Warning lights and messages”) as long asthe function is on. The warning light willgo out when the lever is operate and stayon until the function is automatically de-activated. Time for which the lights stayon can only be increased by operating thelever.
Deactivation
Keep the stalk pulled towards the steer-ing wheel for more than 2 seconds.
fig. 45 F0R0038m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 67
68
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS WINDOW WASHING
The right stalk fig. 46 controls windscreenwiper/washer operation.
WINDSCREEN WASHER/WIPER
The device can only work when the igni-tion key is at MAR.
The stalk ring nut can be moved to fourdifferent positions:O windscreen wiper off;
≤ intermittent;
≥ continuous slow;
¥ continuous fast.
Move the lever to position A (unstable)to limit operation for the time for whichthe lever is held in this position. The leverwill return to position and the wiper willbe automatically stopped when released.
Do not use the windscreenwiper to remove layers ofsnow or ice from the wind-screen. In such conditions, the
windscreen wiper may be subjected toexcessive stress and the motor protec-tion which prevents operation for a fewseconds may trip. If operation is not re-stored, even after turning the key andrestarting the engine, go to a Fiat Deal-ership.
With the ring in position ≤ the wind-screen wiper will automatically adapt tothe speed of the car.
IMPORTANT Replace wiper blades asspecified in section “Car maintenance”.
fig. 46 F0R0039m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 68
69
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSRAIN SENSOR
(where provided)
The rain sensor is located behind the dri-ving mirror in contact with the windscreenand has the purpose of automatically ad-just, during the intermittent operation, thefrequency of the windscreen wiperstrokes as to the rain intensity.
IMPORTANT Keep clean the glass in thesensor area.
Activation
Move the right-hand stalk knurled ring to≤ fig. 46.
The activation of the rain sensor is sig-nalled by a control acquisition “stroke”.
Through the set up menu it is possible toincrease the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
The increase of the sensitivity of the rainsensor is signalled by a control and acqui-sition “stroke”.
Operating the windscreen washer withthe rain sensor activated the normal wash-ing cycle is performed at the end of whichthe rain sensor resumes its normal auto-matic function.
Deactivation
Change the stalk knurled ring positionfrom ≤ fig. 46 or turn the ignition keyto STOP.
At the next start-up (key at MAR), thesensor will not be reactivated even if theknurled ring is at ≤ fig. 46. To reacti-vate the sensor, move the ring from po-sition ≤ to any other position and thenreturn it to position ≤.
Rain sensor activation will be indicated byat least one wiper “stroke” even if thewindscreen is dry.
The rain sensor is able to recognize andautomatically adjust itself in the presenceof the following particular conditions:
❒ presence of dirt on the controlled sur-face (salt, dirt, etc.);
❒ difference between day and night.
IMPORTANT Streaks of water may causeunnecessary blade moving.
“Smart washing” function
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(unstable position) to operate the wind-screen washer.
Keeping the stalk pulled for more than halfa second, with just one movement it ispossible to operate the washer jet and thewiper at the same time.
The wiper stops working three strokes af-ter releasing the stalk.
A further stroke after 6 seconds com-pletes the wiping operation.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 69
70
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS CRUISE CONTROL
(constant speedregulator) (where provided)
It is a device able to support the driver,with electronic control, which allows dri-ving at speed over 30 km/h on long andstraight dry roads (e.g.: motorways), at adesired speed, without pressing the ac-celerator pedal. Therefore it is not sug-gested to use this device on extra-urbanroads with traffic. Do not use it in town.
SWITCHING THE DEVICE ON
Turn knob A-fig. 47 to ON.
The Cruise Control cannot be engagedin first or reverse gear. It is advisable toengage it in 4th or higher gears.
Travelling downhill with the device en-gaged, the car speed may increase morethan the memorised one.
When the device is activated the warn-ing light Ü turns on together with the rel-evant message on the instrument panel(where provided).
STORING THE CAR SPEED
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn knob A-fig. 47 to ON and pressthe accelerator pedal to the requiredspeed;
❒ push the lever up (+) for at least onesecond and release it: the car speed willbe stored. The accelerator pedal maybe released.
If needed (e.g. for overtaking), press theaccelerator pedal to accelerate: the carwill return to the previously set speedwhen the pedal is released.
fig. 47 F0R0041m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 70
71
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSRESTORING STORED SPEED
If the device has been disengaged for ex-ample pressing the brake or clutch pedal,the memorised speed can be reset as fol-lows:
❒ accelerate gradually until reaching aspeed approaching the one stored;
❒ engage the gear selected at the timewhen the speed was originally stored;
❒ press RES B-fig. 47.
INCREASING THE STOREDSPEED
The stored speed can be increased in twoways:
❒ by pressing the accelerator and thenstoring the new speed reached;
or
❒ by moving the stalk upwards (+).
Each operation of the stalk will corre-spond to a slight increase in speed (about1 km/h), while keeping the stalk upwardswill correspond to a continuous speed in-crease.
REDUCING THE STORED SPEED
The stored speed can be increased in twoways:
❒ by switching the device off and thenstoring a new speed;
or
❒ by moving the stalk downwards (–) un-til reaching the new speed which will bestored automatically.
Each operation of the stalk will corre-spond to a slight reduction in speed (about1 km/h), while keeping the stalk down-wards will correspond to a continuousspeed reduction.
SWITCHING THE DEVICE OFF
The device can be switch off in the fol-lowing ways:
❒ by turning knob A to OFF;
❒ by turning the engine off;
❒ by pressing the brake pedal;
❒ by pressing the clutch pedal;
❒ by pressing the accelerator pedal; in thiscase the system is not really switchedoff but the request for accelerationtakes priority over the system. Thecruise control is however active and itwill not be necessary to press buttonRES B-fig. 47 to resume previous con-ditions after ending acceleration.
The device is automatically switched off inone of the following cases:
❒ if the ABS or ESP systems cut-in;
❒ with car speed below the preset limit;
❒ in the case of system failure.
When travelling with the de-vice on, never set the
gearshift lever to neutral.
WARNING
In the event of device faultsor failures, turn knob A to
OFF and contact a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 71
72
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS CEILING LIGHTS
FRONT CEILING WITH SPOTLIGHTS fig.48 /a AND WITHDIFFUSED LIGHTIING LED(where provided) fig.48 /b
Switch A turn on/off these lights.
With switch A in central position, lightsC and D will turn on/off when opening/closing the front doors.
With switch A pressed on the left side,lights C and D will always stay off. Withswitch A pressed on the right side, lightsC and D will always stay on.
Light turning on/off is gradual.
Switch B performs the spot function; withlight off, it will turn on:
❒ light C if pressed on the left side;
❒ light D if pressed on the right side.IMPORTANT Before getting out of thecar, make sure the switch is at central po-sition: lights off with doors closed in or-der to avoid draining the battery.
In any case, if the switch is left inadver-tently to the on position, the lights willturn off automatically 15 minutes afterturning the engine off.
fig. 48/a F0R0043m
FRONT CEILING LIGHT WITHMOVABLE LENS
The light will turn on/off by pressing themovable lens rightwards or leftwards asshown in fig. 49.
fig. 48/b F0R0240m
fig. 49 F0R0042m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 72
73
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSCeiling light timing
On certain versions to facilitate gettingin/out of the car at night or with poorlighting, 2 different timed switching onmodes have been provided.
LIGHT TIMING WHEN GETTING INTO THE CAR
Lights will turn on as follows:
❒ for about 10 seconds when openingfront doors;
❒ for about 3 minutes when opening oneof the side doors;
❒ for about 10 seconds when closing thedoors.
Timing will stop when turning the ignitionkey to MAR.
LIGHT TIMING WHEN GETTING OUTOF THE CAR
After removing the key from the ignitionswitch, the ceiling lights will turn on as fol-lows:
❒ within 2 minutes from turning the en-gine off for about 10 seconds;
❒ when opening one of the side doors forabout 3 minutes;
❒ when closing one of the doors forabout 10 seconds.
Timing will stop automatically when lock-ing the doors.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 73
74
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
COURTESY LIGHTS (where provided) fig. 53
Lights B by the side of the courtesy mir-ror will light up when cover A on the sunvisor on driver’s or passenger’s side israised with the key at MAR. The lights al-lows to use the courtesy mirror also inpoor conditions of light.
IMPORTANT The lights may only be op-erated for 15 minutes when the key isturned to stop STOP. They will be au-tomatically switched off after this to pro-tect the battery charge.
fig. 51 F0R0044m fig. 53
BB
A
F0R0216mfig. 52 F0R0045m
BOOT LIGHT (where provided)fig. 51
For versions fitted with boot light, it willturn on automatically when opening thetailgate and it will turn off at closing.
PUDDLE LIGHTS (where provided) fig. 52
These lights A are located in the doorsand they will turn on when opening therelevant door, regardless of the ignitionkey position.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 74
75
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
ODDMENTS COMPARTMENTCOURTESY LIGHT (where provided) fig. 54
On versions where it is fitted, the lightcomes on automatically when the com-partment is opened and goes out when itis closed.
CONTROLS
HAZARD LIGHTS fig. 55
They turn on by pressing switch A, re-gardless of the position of the ignition key.
When the device is on, the switch is flash-ing and warning lights Î e ¥ on the pan-el come blink.
Press the switch again to turn the lightsoff.
The use of hazard lights is governed by theHighway Code of the country you are in.Keep to the rules.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS (where provided) fig. 56
To turn front fog lights on, press button5, to activate these lights it is necessaryto have the side/taillights switched on.The warning light 5 on the instrumentcluster will come on at the same time.Press the button again to turn the lights off. The use of fog lights is governed by theHighway Code of the country you are in.Keep to the rules.
fig. 55 F0R0047m
fig. 56 F0R0048m
fig. 54 F0R0305m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 75
76
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
DOOR LOCK fig. 59
To open: pull lever A.
To close: close the door and press leverA. Also the rear doors will be locked inthis way (centralised door locking system).
Warning light ́ will light up with the cor-responding message on the multifunctionaldisplay (see chapter “Warning lights andMessages”).
fig. 58 F0R0035m
PARKING LIGHTS
These lights can only be turned on with ig-nition key at STOP or removed, by mov-ing the left stalk knurled ring first to O andthen to position 6 or 2.
The warning light 3 on the instrumentpanel will come on at the same time.
HEATED REAR WINDOW (where provided) fig. 58
Press button A to switch the device on.The device will be switched off automati-cally after approximately 20 minutes.
REAR FOG LIGHTS fig. 57Press button 4 to turn these lights onproviding the dipped beam headlights orthe front fog lights (where provided) areswitched on.
The warning light 4 on the instrumentpanel will light up.
Either press the button again or switch thedipped beam headlights and/or fog lights(where provided) off.
The use of fog lights is governed by theHighway Code of the country you are in.Keep to the rules.
fig. 59 F0R0023mfig. 57 F0R0049m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 76
77
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSDoor unlocking in the event
of a crash
If the fuel cut-off switch trips following anaccident, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to let you leave the car and theceiling lights will be switched on at thesame time. The doors can always beopened from the inside of the car bymeans of the specific levers.
Proceed as follows if no fuel leakage isfound and and the car is in condition to bedriven to rearm the fuel cut-off switch.
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
The car is fitted with a safety switch thatin the event of a crash comes into opera-tion by cutting off fuel and turning off theengine as a consequence.
This device therefore prevents fuel leaksdue to fuel piping breaking.
IMPORTANT After the accident, re-member to remove the electronic keyfrom the ignition device to prevent drain-ing the battery.
The message “FPS on” will appear on thedigital display when the switch trips. Themessage “Inertia switch tripped. See hand-book” will appear on the multifunctionaldisplay.
If, after a crash, you smell fu-el or see leaks from the fuel
system, do not reset the switch toavoid fine risk.
WARNING
If the centralised door lock-ing system was operated
from inside the car and the fuel cut-off switch did not manage to auto-matically release the doors, it will notbe possible to access the passengercompartment from the outside afteran accident. The possibility of open-ing the doors from the outside de-pends on the conditions of the doorsthemselves after the accident: if maynot be possible to open a damageddoor. In this case, try to open the oth-er doors of the car.
WARNING
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 77
78
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
fig. 62 F0R0077m
fig. 61 F0R0104m
fig. 63 F0R0078m
INTERIOR FITTINGS
ODDMENT DRAWER fig. 61-62
To open the drawer operate handle A-fig. 61.
The compartment opening movement isslowed down by a dedicated device.
Inside the drawer there is a space A-fig.62 to keep documents.
When the oddment compartment isopened, an interior courtesy light comeson.
ODDMENT COMPARTMENTS
Oddment compartment A-fig. 63, is lo-cated on the dashboard, on the left of thesteering wheel.
Re-arming the fuel cut-off switch
Before resetting the fuel cut-off switch carefully inspect
the car for fuel leaks.
WARNING
To reset the fuel cut-off switch, press but-ton A-fig. 60.
fig. 60 F0R0208m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 78
79
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
DOOR POCKETS fig. 66
Paper/map pockets are located in doorpanels.
FRONT ARMREST WITHODDMENT COMPARTMENT (where provided)
Certain versions are fitted with armrestA-fig. 67 between the front seats.
To use it, push it down as shown in fig. 68.
Press button A-fig. 68 to raise the up-per part of the arm rest and access com-partment B. Operate lever C to move thearmrest down with respect to the posi-tion of normal use.
fig. 64 F0R0053m
fig. 65 F0R0054m fig. 67 F0R0056m
fig. 68 F0R0057mfig. 66 F0R0055m
Oddment compartment B-fig. 64 is lo-cated in the middle of the dashboard.
CENTRAL CONSOLE ODDMENTCOMPARTMENT
The compartiment A-fig. 65 is located onthe dashboard central zone.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 79
80
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
CIGAR LIGHTER (where provided) fig. 72
It is located on the central console in frontof the handbrake.
Press button A to switch on the cigarlighter with ignition key at MAR.
After about 15 seconds the button will re-turn to its initial position and is ready foruse.
IMPORTANT Always check that the cig-ar lighter has turned off.
fig. 72 F0R0061m
The cigar lighter becomesvery hot. Handle with care.
The device must not be used by chil-dren: risk of fire and/or burns.
WARNING
GLASS HOLDER - CAN HOLDERfig. 69-70
There are cup holders on the central tun-nel (two cup holders in front of the gear-box and one behind it).
CARD BOX - CD BOX fig. 71
The central console features recesses tokeep telephone cards CD holders andmagnetic cards.
fig. 69 F0R0058m fig. 71 F0R0060m
fig. 70 F0R0059m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 80
81
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
ASHTRAY (where provided) fig. 73-74
The ashtray is a removable plastic box thatcan be fitted into the glass/can recesses onthe central console.
IMPORTANT Do not use the box as anashtray and a waste paper basket at thesame time: it might set on fire in contactwith cigarette stubs.
SUN VISORS fig. 75
These are arranged at the sides of the in-ternal rearview mirror. They may be ori-ented frontally and to the side.
A courtesy mirror can be applied to theback of sun visors.
On certain versions to use the mirror(where provided) you shall open the slid-ing cover A.
A courtesy light may light up accordingto the versions when the cover is opened.
fig. 73 F0R0062m fig. 75 F0R0064m fig. 76 F0R0065m
fig. 74 F0R0063m
MAP POCKET (where provided)
On certain versions a map pocket is lo-cated on the back of the seat backrest fig. 76.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 81
82
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS DOORS
CENTRAL DOORLOCKING/UNLOCKING SYSTEM
Locking from the outside
With the doors closed, press button Áonthe remote control fig. 77 or insert andturn the metallic insert in the driver’s sidedoor lock and turn clockwise fig. 78 (an-ticlockwise on the passenger door ). TheLED on the driver’s door will blink onceto indicate that the doors have beenlocked. The doors will be locked only if alldoors are closed. If one or more doorsare open, the indication indicators and theLED on the driver’s door will flash in rapidsequence for approximately 3 seconds ifone or more doors are open when but-ton Á on the remote control is pressedfig. 77.
If instead one or more doors are openedafter turning the metallic insert of the key,only the LED on the driver’s door willblink rapidly for approximately three sec-onds. If all the doors are closed and theboot is open, the doors are locked and:the direction indicators (if locked by press-ing Á fig. 77 only) and the LED on thedriver’s door will flash rapidly for ap-proximately 3 seconds.
Door unlocking from the outside
Briefly press button Ë fig. 77 to obtainremote door unlocking, timed ceiling lightturning on, directions indicator doubleflashing or fit the metal insert into the dri-ver’s door lock and turn it anticlockwise.
fig. 78 F0R0067m
fig. 79 F0R0000m
Door locking/unlocking from theinside
Press lever A-fig. 79 to unlock all doors.Pull the lever to unlock all doors. A LEDon the driver’s door will indicate the state(doors locked or unlocked). The LED ison when the doors are locked and offwhen the doors are unlocked. The doorswill be locked only if all doors are closed.
Lacking power (blown fuse, battery dis-connected, etc.) it is however possible tolock the doors manually.
After exceeding 20 km/h speed, doors willbe locked automatically if the set up menufunction has been selected (see paragraph“Multifunction display” in this section).
fig. 77 F0R0066m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 82
83
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
CHILD LOCK fig. 80
This device prevents opening the reardoors from the inside. This device can beengaged only with rear doors open.❒ position 1 - device engaged (door
locked);❒ position 2 - device not engaged (door
may be opened from the inside).The device A-fig. 80 stays on even if thedoors are unlocked by the centralisedsystem.
fig. 80 F0R0068m
Always use this device whentransporting children. After
engaging the child lock on both reardoors, check for proper engagementby trying to open a rear door with theinternal handle.
WARNING
WINDOW WINDERS
POWER WINDOWS
The driver’s door armrest features twofig. 82 or (where provided) five fig. 81switches that with key at MAR shall beused:
A to open/close the left front window;
B to open/close the right front window;
C to open/close the left rear window(where provided);
D to open/close the right rear window(where provided);
E to inhibit rear door controls (whereprovided).
fig. 81 F0R0200m
fig. 82 F0R0201m
Automatic continuous operation(where provided)
Power windows are equipped with anup/down mechanism for the front driverside window and of a mechanism just forthe down movement of the other win-dows.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 83
84
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS Hold one of the buttons pressed for
longer than half a second to operate theautomatic continuous window operationfunction. The window will stop when itsreached end of travel or when the but-ton is pressed again.
The system conforms to the forthcoming standard
2000/4/EC concerning the safety ofpassengers leaning out of the pas-senger compartment.
WARNINGIMPORTANT With ignition key at STOPor removed, the power windows remainactivated for about 2 minutes and are de-activated immediately the moment a dooris opened.
Important On some versions, pressing theremote control button Ë for over 2 sec-onds will open the windows whereaspressing the remote control button Á forover 2 seconds will close them.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 84
85
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
Power window system initialisation
Safety system shall be re-initialised afterdisconnecting the battery or if the rele-vant protection fuse is blown.
Initialisation procedure:
❒ fully close manually the window to ini-tialise;
❒ rafter the window has reached the up-per end of travel, hold the up buttonpressed for at least one second.
Incorrect use of the powerwindows may be dangerous.
Before operation, always check thatno-one is exposed to the risk of beinginjured by directly by the moving win-dow or objects getting caught anddragged. When leaving the car, al-ways remove the key from the igni-tion device to avoid the risk of injurydue to accidental operation of thepower windows.
WARNING
Front and rear passenger doorwindows (where provided)
Front passenger door armrest and reardoor armrests feature the switches A-fig. 83 to be used for controlling the cor-responding window.
Press button A-fig. 84 to inhibit rear doorcontrols (where provided).
MANUAL REAR (where provided) fig. 85
To open and to close the window use therelevant window winder.
fig. 85 F0R0070mfig. 83 F0R0069m
fig. 84 F0R0000m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 85
86
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS BOOT
OPENING THE BOOT
The boot lock may be released from theoutside of the car by pressing R on theremote control (where provided) or byinserting and turning the metallic insert ofthe key in the boot lock anticlockwise asshown in fig. 88. The boot lock can be re-leased from inside the vehicle operatingon lever A-fig.87 located on driver sideseat or pressing push-button B-fig.89.
BOOT CLOSING
To close the boot, lower it onto the lockuntil you hear it click. In emergency con-ditions (if either the remote control or carbattery is flat), release the boot lock byturn the key in clockwise.
fig. 86 F0R0071m
fig. 87 F0R0210m
fig. 88 F0R0072m
Do not fit additional objectsonto the rear window shelf ortailgate (speakers, spoilers,etc.) except when contem-
plated by the manufacturer to ensurethe correct operation of the side gasshock absorbers of the tailgate itself.
Never exceed the maximumallowed load in the boot (see
“Technical Specifications”). Makesure that the objects are wellarranged in the boot so that they willnot be projected forwards followingsudden braking.
WARNING
Never travel with objects onthe rear window shelf: they
cause cause injury to passengers inthe event of an accident or suddenbraking.
WARNING
fig. 89
B
F0R0239m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 86
87
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSEXTENDING THE BOOT
Partial extension (where provided)(1/3 or 2/3) fig. 91
The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3) ortotally extended splitting the rear seat.
Proceed as follows:
❒ tip the cushions forward;fig. 90 F0R0075m
fig. 91 F0R0076m
❒ pull the two locking devices A-fig. 90upwards to unlock respectively the leftor right section of the backrest andthen guide the backrest onto the cush-ion.
The boot extension to the right makes itpossible to carry two passengers on therear seat left-hand side.
The boot extension to the left makes itpossible to carry one passenger on therear seat right-hand side.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 87
88
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
fig. 93 F0R0078m
To return the rear seat back to itsoriginal position fig. 93
Lift the backrests and push them back un-til your hear both fastening mechanismsclick and return the cushions to the nor-mal position of use.
IMPORTANT When return the backrestto the position of use, make sure it is cor-rectly fastened and you hear the lock click.
Maximum extension fig. 92
Tilt the rear seat completely to obtainmaximum boot extension.
Proceed as follows:
❒ completely lower the rear seat head re-straints;
❒ tip the cushions forward;
❒ pull the fastening devices A-fig. 90 up-wards to release the backrests and foldthem onto the cushion.
fig. 92 F0R0077m
Make sure the backrest isproperly secured at both
sides to prevent it moves forward inthe event of sharp braking causing in-juries to passengers.
WARNING
BONNET
OPENING THE BONNET
Proceed as follows:
❒ pull lever fig. 94 in the direction of thearrow;
❒ operate lever A-fig. 95 as shown in thefigure;
❒ lift the bonnet and at the same time re-lease the rod D-fig. 96 from the catch,then fit end C-fig. 97 of the rod intothe bonnet recess E.
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 88
89
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet,check that windscreen wiper arms are notlifted from the windscreen.
CLOSING THE BONNET
Proceed as follows:
❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand andwith the other remove rod C-fig. 97from seat E and fit it back into its catchD-fig. 96;
❒ lower the bonnet to approximately 20centimetres from the engine compart-ment and let it drop. Make sure that thebonnet is completely closed and notonly fastened by the safety catch by try-ing to open it. If it is not perfectlyclosed, open the bonnet and repeat theprocedure. No not simply press it.
IMPORTANT Always check that the bon-net is closed properly to avoid its openingwhile the car is travelling.
fig. 94 F0R0080m fig. 95 F0R0079m
fig. 97 F0R0082m
fig. 96 F0R0081m
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 89
90
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
The bonnet must always beperfectly closed while trav-
elling for reasons of safety. Make surethat the bonnet is perfectly closedand that the lock is engaged. If youdiscover that the bonnet is not per-fectly closed while travelling, stop im-mediately and close the bonnet in thecorrect manner.
WARNING
The bonnet may drop sud-denly if the supporting rod is
not in correct position.
WARNING
Perform these operationswhen the car is stationary
only.
WARNING
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK
Front couplings are set at points A-fig. 98.
Front couplings are set at points B.
IMPORTANT Follow the instructionscontained in the assembly kit to the letter.Assembly must be performed by qualifiedpersonnel.
fig. 98 F0R0217mCheck that the attachmentfastening screws are correct-
ly positioned after a few kilometres.
WARNING
Respect the laws in force con-cerning maximum clearance.
Distribute the load evenlyand when driving, bear in
mind the increased sensitivity of thecar to side wind.
WARNING
Never exceed the permittedweight (see section “Techni-cal specifications”).
044-090 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 90
91
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSHEADLIGHTS
BEAM DIRECTION
Correction direction of the headlights isessentially for the comfort and safety ofthe driver and the other road users. Theheadlights must be correctly directed toensure the best visibility conditions whenthe headlights are on. Contact Fiat Deal-ership to have the headlights properly ad-justed.
HEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE
This device works with the key at MARand the dipped beam headlights on. Thecar will slant backwards when it is loaded,raising the light beam. The beams musttherefore be directed again in this case.
Aiming the headlights fig. 99
Press Ò and on the control panel.
The display located on the instrument pan-el, provides the visual indication of the po-sitions during the adjustment operation.
Position 0 - one or two passengers onfront seats.
Position 1 - five passengers.
Position 2 - five passengers + load in theboot.
Position 3 - driver + maximum admittedload in the boot.
IMPORTANT Check beam aiming everytime the load carried changes.
AIMING THE FRONT FOGLIGHTS (where provided)
Contact Fiat Dealership to have the head-lights properly adjusted.
fig. 99 F0R0083m
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 91
92
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS ABS SYSTEM
If you have never driven a car with ABS be-fore, it is advisable to perform a few testson slippery ground, naturally in conditionsof safety and respecting the Highway Codeof the country where you are driving. Readthe following information carefully.
The car is fitted with an ABS braking sys-tem, which prevents the wheels from lock-ing when braking, makes the most of roadgrip and gives the best control when emer-gency braking under difficulty road condi-tions.
System is completed by EBD (ElectronicBraking force Distribution), which dis-tributes the braking action between frontand rear wheels.
IMPORTANT Maximum efficiency of thebraking system is obtained after approxi-mately 500 km (when the car is new or af-ter replacing the brake pads/discs): duringthis time, avoid sudden, repeated and pro-longed braking.
The ABS exploits the tyre-road grip at the best, but it
cannot improve it; you should there-fore take every care when driving onslippery surfaces without taking un-necessary risks.
WARNING
ABS SYSTEM INTERVENTION
Intervention of the ABS is detected by aslight pulsing of the brake pedal accompa-nied by noise: such an event indicates thatyou need to adjust your speed to the typeof road on which you are travelling.
When the ABS intervenes itmeans that you are ap-
proaching the grip limit between tyresand road: slow down to exploit all theavailable grip.
WARNING
FAILURE INDICATIONS
ABS failure
ABS failure is indicated by the turning onof warning light >on the instrument pan-el together with the dedicated message onthe multifunctional display (where pro-vided), (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).
In the case, the braking system will workas normal without the extra potentials of-fered by the ABS system. Drive carefullyto the nearest Fiat Dealership to have thesystem checked.
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 92
93
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSBRAKE ASSIST
(integrated ESP emergencybraking assistance) (where provided)
This system (which cannot be deactivat-ed) recognises emergency braking condi-tions according to the speed of operationof the brake pedal and provides an addi-tional hydraulic braking pressure to sup-port that provided by the driver. This al-lows faster and more power operation ofthe braking system.
Brake Assist is deactivated on the versionsequipped with ESP, in the event of ESP sys-tem failure (indicated by warning light áswitching on together with the messageon the multifunctional display, where pro-vided).
ESP SYSTEM (Electronic StabilityProgram) (where provided)
The ESP system is an electronic systemcontrolling the car stability in the event oftyre grip loss.
The ESP system is therefore particularlyuseful when grip conditions of the road sur-faces changes.
In addition to the ESP system, ASR systemand Hill Holder, (where provided) also theMSR system (adjusting the engine brakingtorque) and the HBA system (improvingthe braking force during emergency brak-ing) are provided.
ABS SYSTEM INTERVENTION
It is signalled by the blinking of the warn-ing light á on the instrument panel, toinform the driver that the car is in criti-cal stability and grip conditions.
When the ABS cuts in, andyou feel the brake pedal pul-
sating, do not remove your foot, butkeep it pressed; in doing so you willstop in the shortest amount of spacepossible under the current road con-ditions.
WARNING
EBD failure
ABS failure is indicated by the turning onwarning lights > and x on the instru-ment panel together with the dedicatedmessage on the multifunctional display(where provided), (see section “Warninglights and messages”).
In this case, the rear wheels may sudden-ly lock and the car may swerve. Drivecarefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership tohave the system checked.
If warning light x only lightsup on the instrument panel
(with a message on the multifunc-tional display, where provided), stopthe car immediate and go to thenearest Fiat Dealership. Leakage ofhydraulic fluid from the braking sys-tem will compromise functionality ofthe braking system, either of the con-ventional type or with ABS.
WARNING
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 93
94
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS ESP SYSTEM ACTIVATION
The ESP system is automatically activat-ed when the car is started and cannot bede-activated.
FAILURE INDICATIONS
In the event of a failure, the In ESP will beautomatically switched off and warninglight áwill appear on the instrument pan-el along with a message on the multifunc-tional display (where provided) (see“Warning lights and messages”). The LEDon the ASR OFF button will light up. Con-tact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
Do not take unnecessaryrisks, even if your cars fits an
ESP system. Your driving style mustalways be suited to the conditions ofthe road, visibility and traffic. The dri-ver is always and only responsible forroad safety.
WARNING
HILL HOLDER SYSTEM
This system is an integral part of the ESPsystem and it is provided to facilitate start-ing on slopes.
It will activate automatically with the fol-lowing conditions:
❒ uphill: car at a standstill on a road witha gradient higher than 5%, engine run-ning, clutch and brake pedal pressed,gearbox to neutral or engaged gear oth-er than reverse.
❒ downhill: car at a standstill on a roadwith a gradient higher than 5%, enginerunning, clutch and brake pedal pressedand reverse gear engaged.
At pickup the ESP system control unit willkeep brake force on wheels until reachingthe torque suitable for starting, or in anycase for max. 2 seconds in order to passeasily from the brake pedal to the accel-erator pedal.
After 2 seconds without starting, the sys-tem will deactivate automatically by re-leasing gradually the brake force.
At releasing, the typical brake disengage-ment noise indicating that the car is go-ing to move will be heard.
Failure indications
Warning light è on the instrument pan-el will light up in the event of a failure (see“Warning lights and messages”).
IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system isnot a parking brake therefore, never leavethe car without having engaged the hand-brake, turned the engine off and engagedthe first speed.
For correct operation of theESP and ASR systems, the
tyres must absolutely be of the samebrand and type on all wheels, in per-fect conditions and, above all, oftype, brand and size specified.
WARNING
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 94
95
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
MSR system (engine braking torque control)
It is an integral part of the ASR system thatin case of sudden gear shifting, cuts in pro-viding torque to the engine thus prevent-ing excessive driving wheel drive that, spe-cially in poor grip conditions, can lead toloss of stability.
Switching the system on/off fig. 100The ASR system switches on automaticallyeach time the engine is started. When travelling, the ASR can be switchedoff and on again pres100.
When the ASR is switched off this isshown by the lighting up of the led on thebutton and by relevant message on themultifunction display, where provided.If the ASR is switched off when travelling,it will turn on again automatically the nexttime the engine is started.It may be useful to switch the ASR whendriving on snow-covered roads with snowchains fitted: in these conditions, slippingof the wheels during pick-up provides bet-ter traction.
For correct operation of theESP and ASR systems, the
tyres must absolutely be of the samebrand and type on all wheels, in per-fect conditions and, above all, oftype, brand and size specified.
WARNING
fig. 100
ASROFF
A
F0R0218m
ASR SYSTEM (Antislip Regulator)The ASR function controls car drive andcuts in automatically every time one orboth driving wheels slip.
According to slipping conditions, two dif-ferent control systems are activated:
❒ if slipping involves both driving wheels,the ASR function intervenes reducingthe power transmitted by the engine;
❒ if the slipping involves only one drivingwheel, the ASR system cuts in auto-matically braking the wheel that is slip-ping.
The action of the ASR is particularly help-ful in the following circumstances:
❒ slipping of the inner wheel due to theeffect of dynamic load changes or ex-cessive acceleration;
❒ too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditionsof the road surface;
❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy orfrozen surfaces;
❒ in the case of loss of grip on a wet sur-face (aquaplaning).
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 95
96
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
Do not take unnecessaryrisks, even if your cars fits
such a system. Your driving style mustalways be suited to the conditions ofthe road, visibility and traffic. The dri-ver is always and only responsible forroad safety.
WARNING
For correct operation of the ASR system,the tyres must absolutely be of the samebrand and type on all wheels, in perfectconditions and, above all, of type, brandand size specified.
FAILURE INDICATIONS
In the event of a failure, the In ASR will beautomatically switched off and warninglight á will appear on the instrumentpanel along with a message on the multi-functional display (where provided) (see“Warning lights and messages”). In thiscase, contact Fiat Dealership as soon aspossible.
EOBD SYSTEM(where provided)
The EOBD system (European On BoardDiagnosis) allows continuous diagnosis ofthe components of the car correlated withemissions.
It also alerts the driver, by turning on thewarning light U on the instrument pan-el (together with relevant message on themultifunctional display, where provided)(see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”), when these conditions are nolonger in peak conditions.
The objective is:
❒ to monitor system efficiency;
❒ warn when a fault causes emissions lev-els to increase;
❒ to warn of the need to replace deteri-orated components.
The system also has a diagnostic connec-tor that can be interfaced with appropri-ate tools, which makes it possible to readthe error codes stored in the control unit,together with a series of specific parame-ters for engine operation and diagnosis.This check can also be carried out by thetraffic police.
IMPORTANT After eliminating the in-convenience, to check the system com-pletely, Fiat Dealerships are obliged to runa bench test and, if necessary, road testswhich may also call for a long journey.
Go to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible if warninglight U either does not lightup when the key is turned to
MAR to if while travelling the warninglights comes on either steady or blink-ing (along with a message on the mul-tifunctional display, where provided).The operation of warning light Umaybe checked by the traffic police usingspecific devices. Follow the laws inforce in the country where you are dri-ving.
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 96
97
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSPARKING SENSORS
(where provided)
Parking sensors are located in the rearbumper fig. 101 and their function is toinform the driver, through an intermittentbuzzer, about the presence of obstaclesbehind the car.
ACTIVATION
The sensors are automatically activatedwhen the reverse gear is engaged.
As the distance from the obstacle behindthe car decreases, the acoustic alarm be-comes more frequent.
BUZZER WARNINGS
When the reverse gear is engaged an in-termittent acoustic signal is automaticallyactivated.
The acoustic signal:
❒ becomes louder as the reduction of dis-tance between the car and the obstacledecreases;
❒ becomes continuous when the distancebetween the car and the obstacle is lessthat 30 cm and stops immediately if thedistance increases;
❒ is constant if the distance is unvaried;if this situation concerns the side sen-sors, the buzzer will stop after about3 seconds to avoid, for example, warn-ing indications in the event of manoeu-vres along walls.
Detection distances
Central action radius 150 cm
Side action radius 60 cm
If several obstacles are detected, the con-trol unit indicates the nearest one.
FAILURE INDICATIONS
Parking sensor failures, if any, will be in-dicated when engaging reverse by theturning on of the instrument panel warn-ing light t together with the message onthe multifunction display, where provided(see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”).
fig. 101 F0R0084m
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 97
98
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS GENERAL WARNINGS
❒ When parking, take the utmost care toobstacles that may be set above or un-der the sensors.
❒ Objects set close to the car, under cer-tain circumstances are not detected andcould therefore cause damages to thecar or be damaged.
❒ Indications sent by the sensors can bealtered by dirt, snow or ice depositedon the sensors or by ultrasound sys-tems (e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes orpneumatic hammers) set nearby thecar.
The sensor must be cleanfrom mud, dirt, snow or ice inorder for the system to work.Be careful not to scratch or
damage the sensor while cleaningthem. Avoid using dry, rough or hardcloths. Clean the sensors with cleanwater with the addition of car sham-poo if necessary.
The driver is always and on-ly responsible for parking
and other dangerous manoeuvres.Make sure that no-one is standing inthe area, especially children or ani-mals. Parking sensors are designed toassist drivers: in all cases, you must al-ways pay the utmost attention duringpotentially dangerous manoeuvres.
WARNINGOPERATION WITH TRAILER
Parking sensor operation is deactivated au-tomatically when the trailer electric cableplug is fitted into the car tow hook socket.
Sensors are reactivated when removingthe trailer cable plug.
In washing stations, clean sensors quicklykeeping the vapour jet/high pressurewashing nozzles at 10 cm at least from thesensors.
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 98
99
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSSOUND SYSTEM
(where provided)
For the operation of the radio withCD/MP3 CD (where provided), read theinstructions for use given in the Supple-ment attached to the Owner Handbook.
SOUND SYSTEM PRESETTING(where provided)The system consists of:❒ sound system power wires❒ front and rear speaker connecting
wires❒ aerial power wire❒ 2 tweeters on front doors (30W max
power each);❒ 2 mid-woofers on front doors (165
mm diameter, 40W max powereach);
❒ 4/6 full-range speakers on rear doorsand rear valance panels (130 mmdiameter, 40W max power each);
❒ radio aerial wire.
Sound system installation
The sound system shall be installed in theproper space occupied by the centraloddment compartment, here you will findthe preset cables.
Lower the fasteners shown in fig. 102 toremove the box.
fig. 102 F0R0085m
For connection to existing carpresetting system, contact
Fiat Dealership to prevent any troublethat could impair car safety.
WARNING
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 99
100
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS TRANSCEIVERSAND MOBILE PHONES
Radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: e-tacsmobile phones, HAM radio systems andthe like) shall not be used inside the carunless a separate aerial is mounted on theroof.
IMPORTANT The use of similar devicesinside the passenger compartment (with-out separated aerial) produces radio-fre-quency electromagnetic fields which, am-plified by the resonance effects inside thepassenger compartment, may cause elec-trical systems equipping the car to mal-function. This could compromise safety inaddition to constituting a potential hazardfor the passengers.
In addition, transmission and reception ofthese devices may be affected by theshielding effect of the car body.
As concerns EC-approved mobile phones(GSM, GPRS, UMTS), strictly comply withthe instructions for use provided by themobile phone’s manufacturer.
ACCESSORIESPURCHASED BY THEOWNER
If after buying the car, you decide to installelectrical accessories that require a per-manent electric supply (alarm, satellite an-titheft system, etc.) or accessories that inany case burden the electric supply, con-tact Fiat Dealership, whose qualified per-sonnel, besides suggesting the most suit-able devices belonging to Lineaccessori Fi-at, will also evaluate the overall electric ab-sorption, checking whether the car’s elec-tric system is able to withstand the loadrequired, or whether it needs to be inte-grated with a more powerful battery.
Be very careful when fittingnon-standard additional
spoilers, light alloy wheels or wheelcups: they could reduce brake venti-lation and consequently brake effi-ciency in the case of repeated, violentbraking or on long downhill roads.Make sure that nothing obstructs thepedal stroke (mats, etc.)
WARNING
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONICDEVICE INSTALLATION
Electrical and electronic devices installedafter buying the car by after-market ser-vice must carry the following label:
Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorises the installationof transceiving devices provided that theyare installed according to rules of good en-gineering practice respecting the manu-facturer’s indications by a specialised cen-tre.
IMPORTANT Traffic police may not allowthe car on the road in the event of as-sembly of devices which imply modifica-tions to the features of the car. This mayalso cause lapse of warranty in relation tofaults caused by the change or either di-rectly or indirectly related to it.
Fiat Auto S.p.A. shall not be liable for dam-age caused by the installation of acces-sories either not supplied or recom-mended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. and/or in-stalled in compliance with the provided in-structions.
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 100
101
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
W
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLSAT THE FILLING
STATION
PETROL ENGINES
Use only unleaded petrol.
To avoid mistakes, the diameter of the fu-el filler is too small to introduce the beakof a leaded petrol pump. The petrol oc-tane rating (RON) must not be lower than 95.
IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst leadsto harmful exhaust emissions, thus con-tributing to air pollution.
IMPORTANT Never use leaded petrol,even in small amount or in an emergency,as this would damage the catalyst beyondrepair.
DIESEL ENGINES
If the outside temperature is very low, thediesel thickens due to the formation ofparaffin clots and could clog the diesel fu-el filter.
In order to avoid these problems, differ-ent types of diesel are distributed ac-cording to the season: summer type, win-ter type and arctic type (cold, mountainareas).
If refuelling with diesel fuel whose featuresare not suitable to the temperature of use,it is advisable to mix TUTELA DIESEL ARTadditive in the proportions shown on thecontainer with the fuel. Pour the additiveinto the tank before the fuel.
When using or parking the car for a longtime in the mountains or cold areas, it isadvisable to refuel using locally availablefuel.
In this case, it is also advisable to keep thetank over 50% full.
For diesel engines, use dieselfuel for motor vehicles com-pliant with EN590 Europeanspecifications only. The use of
other products or mixtures may dam-age the engine beyond repair and con-sequently cause lapse of warranty inrelation to the damage caused. If youaccidentally introduce other types offuel in the tank, do not start the engineand empty the tank. If the engine hasrun also for a very short time, you willneed to have the entire fuel feed sys-tem emptied in addition to the tank.
Filling the tank
To fill the tank completely, top-up twiceafter the pump switches off. Further top-ups could cause faults in the fuel feedingsystem.
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 101
102
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND
CONT
ROLS
FUEL FILLER CAP fig. 103
To carry out fuelling, if your car fits a cen-tralised door locking system, unlock thedoors, open lid A and unscrew cap B; thecap is fitted with a special device C whichfastens it to the lid so it cannot be mislaid.
If your car does not fit a centralised lock-ing system, operate lever A-fig. 104 torelease the flap.
In some versions, cap B may be providedwith a lock and key; use the ignition keyto access the flap A-fig. 103, turn it an-ticlockwise and loosen the cap itself.
The airtight closing may determine a slightincrease of pressure in the tank. A suctionnoise when you release the cap is there-fore entirely normal.
PROTECTING THEENVIRONMENT
The devices for curtailing petrol engineemissions are the following:
❒ three-way catalytic converter;
❒ lambda sensors;
❒ fuel evaporation system.
In addition, do not let the engine run, evenfor a test, with one or more spark plugsdisconnected.
The devices for curtailing diesel fuel en-gine emissions are the following:
❒ oxidising catalytic converter;
❒ exhaust gas recirculation system(E.G.R.).
fig. 103 F0M0203m
Do not approach nakedflames or lit sigarettes to the
fuel filler: fire risk. Keep your faceaway from the fuel filler to preventbreathing in harmful vapours.
WARNING
fig. 104 F0R0210m
When refuelling, position the cap on thedevice inside the lid as shown in fig. 103.
The catalytic converter de-velops high temperature dur-
ing operation. Do not park on grass,dry leaves, pine needles or other flam-mable material: fire risk.
WARNING
091-102 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:29 Pagina 102
103
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARW
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
SEAT BELTS ........................................................................... 104
S.B.R. SYSTEM ....................................................................... 105
PRETENSIONERS.................................................................. 106
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY...................................... 109
“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX” CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ASSEMBLY SETUP........................ 114
FRONT AIRBAGS................................................................. 115
SIDE AIRBAGS ...................................................................... 118
SSSSAAAAFFFFEEEETTTTYYYY DDDDEEEEVVVVIIIICCCCEEEESSSS
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 103
104
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
AR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
The rear seat belts must be used as shownin the diagram in fig. 2.
SEAT BELTS
USING THE SEAT BELTS fig. 1
The belt should be worn keeping the cheststraight and rested against the seat back.
To fasten the seat belts, take hold thetongue A and insert it into the buckle B,until hearing the locking click.
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again with-out jerking.
Press button C to release the belt. Ac-company the belt while it is being re-wound to prevent twisting.
Through the reel, the belt automaticallyadapts to the body of the passenger wear-ing it, allowing freedom of movement.
The reel may lock when the car is parkedon a steep slope: this is perfectly normal.Furthermore, the reel mechanism locksthe belt if it is pulled and in the event ofsudden braking, collisions and on highspeed bends.
The rear seat is fitted with inertial seatbelts with three anchor points and reel.
fig. 1 F0R0150m
fig. 2 F0R0088m
Never press button C-fig. 1when travelling.
WARNING
fig. 3
A
B
F0R0151m
ADJUSTING THE FRONT SEATBELT HEIGHT
Always adjust the seat belt height to thepassenger’s body: this precaution mayconsiderably reduce the risk of injury inthe event of a collision.
Correct regulation is obtained when thebelt passes approximately half way be-tween the shoulder and the neck.
To adjust, move the grip A-fig. 3 of thelocking mechanism either up or down andat the same time move the ring B-fig. 3to the most suitable of the allowed posi-tions.
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 104
105
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARW
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
IMPORTANT Make sure the backrest iscorrectly fastened when returning it to theposition of normal use after folding it.
S.B.R. SYSTEM
The car is fitted with the S.B.R. system(Seat Belt Reminder), consisting of abuzzer which, together with the turningon of warning light < on the instrumentpanel, warns the driver to fasten the seatbelt.
The buzzer can be deactivated (until thenext engine stop) as follows:
❒ fasten the driver’s and passenger’s seatbelt;
❒ turn the ignition key to MAR;
❒ wait for over 20 seconds and then re-lease one of the seat belts.
For permanent deactivation, contact FiatDealership.
With digital display, the S.B.R. system canonly be reset at Fiat Dealership.
Remember that in the eventof a violent collision, back
seat passengers not wearing seat beltsalso represent a serious danger forthe front seat passengers.
WARNING
Make sure the backrest isproperly secured at both
sides to prevent it moves forward inthe event of sharp braking causing in-juries to passengers.
WARNING
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 105
106
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
AR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
PRETENSIONERS
To increase the efficiency of the seat belts,the car is fitted with pretensioners. Thesedevices, in the event of a violent crash,rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.In this way they ensure that the seat beltadheres perfectly to the wearer before therestraining action begins.
The seat belt locks to indicate that the de-vice has intervened; the seat belt cannotbe drawn back up even when guiding itmanually.
IMPORTANT To obtain the highest de-gree of protection from the action of thepretensioner, wear the seat belt keepingit firmly close to the chest and pelvis.
A slight amount of smoke may be detect-ed during operation of the pretensioners.This smoke is not harmful and does notindicate a fire.
The pretensioner does not require anymaintenance or greasing.
Anything that modifies its original condi-tions invalidates its efficiency.
If due to unusual natural events (floods,seas storm, etc.) the device has been af-fected by water and mud, it must neces-sarily be replaced.
LOAD LIMITERS
To increase passenger’s safety, the frontseat belt reels contain a load limiter whichallows controlled sag in such a way as todose the force acting on the chest andshoulders during the belt restraining ac-tion in case of front crash.
The pretensioner can onlybe used once. Go to a Fiat
Dealership to have it replaced afteris has been deployed. The expirationdate is shown on the label in the odd-ment compartment: go to a FiatDealership to have the device re-placed when the expiration date ap-proaches.
WARNING
Operations which lead toknocks, vibrations or localisedheating (over 100°C for amaximum of 6 hours) in the
area around the pretensioners maycause damage or trigger them. Thesedevices are not affected by vibrationscaused by irregularities of the road sur-face or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc.Contact a Fiat Dealership for any as-sistance.
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 106
107
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARW
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FORUSING THE SEAT BELTS
The driver is responsible for respectingand ensuring that all the other occupantsof the car also respect the local laws inforce in relation to the use of seat belts.Always fasten the seat belts before start-ing off.
Seat belts must also be used by pregnantwomen: risk will be significantly reducedfor both the expectant mother and thechild in the event of an accident.
Of course they must position the lowerpart of the belt very low down so that itpasses under the abdomen, see fig. 4.
fig. 4 F0R0089m fig. 5 F0R0090m fig. 6 F0R0091m
The belt must not be twist-ed. The upper part must
cross the shoulder and the chest di-agonally. The lower part must adhereto the hips fig. 4 not to the abdomen.Do not use devices (clips, etc.) to holdthe seat belt away from your body.
WARNING
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 107
108
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
AR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
For maximum safety, keepthe back of your seat up-
right, lean back into it and make surethe seat belt fits closely across yourchest and hips. Always fasten the seatbelts on both the front and the rearseats. Travelling without seat beltswill increase the risk of severe injuryand even death in the event of an ac-cident.
WARNING
Never disassemble or tamperwith the seat belt or preten-
sioner components. All interventionsmust be performed by qualified andauthorised personnel only. Always goto a Fiat Dealership
WARNING
If the belt has been subject-ed to heavy stress, for ex-
ample after and accident, it should bechanged completely together withthe anchors, anchor fastening screwsand the pretensioners. In fact, even ifthe belt has no visible defects, it couldhave lost its resilience.
WARNING
Each seat belt may only beused by one person at a
time: do not carry children on yourlap with one seat belt protectingboth. In general, do not place any ob-jects between the person and belt.
WARNING
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 108
109
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARW
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
HOW TO KEEP THE SEATBELTS ALWAYS IN EFFICIENTCONDITIONS
Observe the following:
❒ always use the belt with the tap taut andnever twisted; make sure that it is freeto run without impediments;
❒ replace the belt after an accident of acertain severity even if it does not ap-pear damaged. Always replace the beltif the pretensioners where deployed.
❒ to clean the belt, wash by hand with wa-ter and mild soap, rinse and leave to dryin the shade. Do not use strong deter-gents, bleach, paints or any other sub-stance which could damage the belt fi-bres;
❒ keep the reels dry: correct operationmay only be ensured if the reels are dry;
❒ replace the seat belt when showing sig-nificant wear or cut signs.
For optimal protection in the event of acrash, all passengers must be seated andwearing adequate restraint systems.
This is even more important for children.
This prescription is compulsory in all ECcountries according to EC Directive2003/20/EC.
A child’s head is larger and heavier in pro-portion to its body and the child’s muscu-lar and bone structures are not fully de-veloped. For this reason, they require re-straint systems which are different fromthose used by adults to protect them in theevent of an accident. The research resultsin relation to the best protection for chil-dren is illustrated in European RegulationEEC-R44 which divides the restraint sys-tems into five groups in addition to mak-ing their use compulsory:
Group 0 0-10 kg in weight
Group 0+ 0-13 kg in weight
Group 1 9-18 kg in weight
Group 2 15-25 kg in weight
Group 3 22-36 kg in weight
As it may be noted, the groups overlappartly and in fact, in commerce it is pos-sible to find devices that cover more thanone weight group.
All restraint devices must bear the certi-fication data, together with the controlbrand, on a solidly fixed label which mustabsolutely never be removed.
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 109
110
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
AR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
Do not place a cradle seatfacing backwards on the
front seat if the passenger side airbagis on. Deployment of the airbag in anaccident could cause fatal injuries tothe baby regardless of the severity ofthe collision. It is advisable to carrychildren in an appropriate restraintsystem on the rear seat which is themost protected position in the eventof an accident.
WARNING
SEVERE DANGER If youneed to carry a baby on thefront passenger seat in acradle restraint system fac-ing backwards, the passen-ger side airbags (front and
side bags, where provided) must bedeactivated using the setup menu.Check the warning light Fon the in-strument panel. Move the passenger’sseat as far back as possible to avoidcontact between the cradle and thedashboard.
WARNINGOver 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children areconsidered as adults and wear the seatbelts normally.
Lineaccessori Fiat includes child restraintsystems for each weight group. These de-vices are recommended having beenspecifically designed for Fiat cars.
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 110
111
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARW
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
GROUP 0 and 0+Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facingbackwards on a cradle seat, which, sup-porting the head, does not induce stresson the neck in the event of sharp decel-eration.The cradle is restrained by the car seatbelts fig. 7 and in turn it must restrain thechild with its own belts.
fig. 7 F0R0092m
The figures are indicative for assembly purposes only. Refer to the in-structions supplied with the child restraint.
WARNING
Some child restraint systems for weight group 0 and 1 have a rear at-tachment to the car seat belts and its own seat belts for securing the child.
Due to their weight, they may be dangerous if incorrectly mounted (e.g. if fastenedto the car seat belts with a cushion in between). Follow the assembly instructionscarefully.
WARNING
fig. 8 F0R0093m fig. 9 F0R0094m
GROUP 2
Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the carseat belts directly fig. 9. The child seat isonly needed to position the child correctlywith respect to the belts so that the di-agonal section crosses the child’s chestand never the neck and is snug on the hipsnot the abdomen.
GROUP 1
Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, chil-dren may be carried facing forwards, withseat fitted with front cushion, throughwhich the car seat belt restrains both childand seat fig. 8.
The figure is indicative forassembly purposes only. Re-
fer to the instructions supplied withthe child restraint.
WARNING
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 111
112
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
AR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
GROUP 3
For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the sizeof the child’s chest no longer requires asupport to space the child’s back from theseat back.
Fig. 10 shows proper child seat posi-tioning on the rear seat.
Children taller than 1.50 m can wear seatbelts like adults.
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’SSEAT USE
The car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs thearrangement possibilities for child restraints on the various seats of the car as shownin the following table:
fig. 10 F0R0095m
The figure is indicative forassembly purposes only. Re-
fer to the instructions supplied withthe child restraint.
WARNING
Weight Passenger Passenger PassengerGroup group front rear rear
central
Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg U (▼) U *
Group 1 9-18 kg U (▼) U *
Group 2 15-25 kg U (▼) U *
Group 3 22-36 kg U (▼) U *
Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to Eu-ropean Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”.
(▼) on cars not fitted with passenger’s seat adjustable in height, the seat back shall bepositioned perfectly upright.
* Never mount child restraint systems on the rear central seat.
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 112
113
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARW
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
Below is a summary of the rules ofsafety to be followed for carryingchildren:
1) The recommended position for in-stalling child’s seat is on the rear seat, asit is the most protected in the case of acrash.
2) If the passenger’s air bag is deactivat-ed always check the amber warning lighton the cluster to make sure that it has ac-tually been deactivated.
3) Carefully follow the instructions sup-plied with the child restraint system whichare mandatory by law. Keep the instruc-tions in the car along with the other pa-pers and this handbook. Do not use childseats without instructions.
4) Always check the seat belt is well fas-tened by pulling the webbing.
5) Only one child is to be strapped toeach retaining system.
6) Always check the seat belts do not fitaround the child’s throat.
7) While travelling, do not let the childsit incorrectly or release the belts.
8) Never carry children on your lap, evennewborns. No-one, however strong, canhold a child in the case of an accident.
9) In case of an accident, replace thechild’s seat with a new one.
Do not place a cradle seatfacing backwards on the
front seat if the passenger side airbagis on. Deployment of the airbag in anaccident could cause fatal injuries tothe baby regardless of the severity ofthe collision. It is advisable to carrychildren in an appropriate restraintsystem on the rear seat which is themost protected position in the eventof an accident.
WARNING
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 113
114
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
AR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX”CHILD RESTRAINTASSEMBLY SETUP
This car is preset for mounting the Uni-versal Isofix child restraint system, a newEuropean standardised system for carry-ing children safely.
An example of child seat is shown as anexample in fig. 11.
The Universal Isofix child’s seat coversweight group: 1.
Due to its different anchoring system, theUniversal Isofix child’s seat shall be an-chored to the proper lower metal ringsA-fig. 12, set between rear seat back andcushion. The upper belt (provided withthe child’s seat) shall be then secured toring B-fig. 13 set in the boot at child’s seatlevel.
It is possible to mount at the same timeboth the traditional restraint system andthe “Universal Isofix” one.
Remember that in case of Universal Isofixchild’s seat, you can only use all thoseseats approved with the marking EECR44/03 “Universal Isofix”.
fig. 12 F0R0097m
fig. 11 F0R0096m fig. 13 F0R0098m
Fit the child seat when thecar is stationary. The child
seat is correctly anchored to thebrackets when you hear the click. Fol-low the instructions for assembly, dis-assembly and positioning that themanufacturer must supply with thechild seat.
WARNINGUniversal Isofix “Duo Plus” child seat isavailable from Lineaccessori Fiat.
For any further installation/use detail, re-fer to the “Instructions Manual” that mustbe provided by the child restraint systemManufacturer.
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 114
115
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARW
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
FRONT AIRBAGS
The car is provided with front airbags forthe driver and the passenger.
The front driver / passenger air bags havebeen designed to protect the occupants inthe event of head-on crashes of medium-high severity, by placing the cushion be-tween the occupant and the steeringwheel or dashboard.
Front air bags are designed to protectcar’s occupants in front crashes and there-fore non-activation in other types of col-lisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction.
An electronic control unit will make thebag inflate in the event of a frontal crash.The bag will inflate instantaneously placingitself between the front occupant’s bodyand the structures which could cause in-jury. It will deflate immediately afterwards.
Driver and passenger front airbags are nota replacement of but complementary tothe belts, which you are recommended toalways wear, as specified by law in Europeand most non-European countries.
The volume of front air bags at max. in-flation fills most of the space between thesteering wheel and the driver and between the dashboard and the passenger.
E
E
D
C
D
C
B
B1
A
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ONUNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD’S SEAT USE
The table below, according to EKE 16 European Directive, shows the different instal-lation possibilities of Isofix restraint systems on seats fitted with Universal Isofix fas-teners.
Weight group Orientation Class Isofix position child seat Isofix size rear side
Group 0 0 to 10 kg
Group 0+ 0 to 13 kg
Group 1to 9 up to 18 kg
IUF: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems to be set facing forwards, universal class(fitted with third upper fastener), approved for the weight group.
IL: suitable for special child restraint systems. Isofix type suitable and tested for this typeof car. The seat may be installed by moving the front seat forward.
IL
IL
IL
IL
IL
IL
IUF
IUF
IUF
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing backwards
Facing forwards
Facing forwards
Facing forwards
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 115
116
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
AR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAGfig. 15
It consists of an instant-inflating cushioncontained into a special recess in thedashboard, this cushion has a volume big-ger than that of the driver.
fig. 14 F0R0099m
fig. 15 F0R0100m
The airbags are not deployed in the eventof collisions of low severity (for which thewithholding action of the seat belts is suf-ficient). For this reason, the seat belt mustbe worn at all times. In the case of sidecollisions, the seat belts hold occupants inthe correct position and prevent beingthrown out of the car by a very violentcollision.
DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG fig. 14
It consists of an instant-inflating cushioncontained in a special recess in the cen-tre of the steering wheel.
Do not apply stickers or oth-er objects on the steering
wheel, passenger side airbag cover orside upholstery on roof. Do not placeobjects on the passenger side dash-board because these could interferewith the correct opening of the airbag(e.g. mobile phones) and cause severeinjury to occupants.
WARNINGIn the event of a collision, a person notwearing a seat belt may be thrown for-ward and con into contact with the bagbefore it has fully opened. The protectionoffered by the cushion is reduced in sucha case.
Front air bag may not be activated in thefollowing situations:
❒ in collisions against highly deformableobjects not affecting the car front sur-face (e.g. bumper collision against guardrail, etc.);
❒ jamming of the car underneath othervehicles or protective barriers (e.g. un-derneath a truck or a guard rail); in thiscase, the bags would offer no addition-al protection with respect to the seatbelt and their deployment is unneces-sary. No deployment in such cases isconsequently not the sign of a fault.
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 116
117
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARW
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
MANUAL DEACTIVATION OFPASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG AND SIDE BAG (where provided)
Should it be absolutely necessary to car-ry a child on the front seat, the passenger’sfront air bag and the Side Bag (where pro-vided) can be deactivated.
The instrument panel warning light Fwill stay on glowing steadily until reacti-vating the passenger’s front air bag and theSide Bag (where provided).
SEVERE DANGER: Do notarranged cradle child re-straints facing backwards ifthe passenger’s airbag is on.Deployment of the airbag inan accident could cause fa-
tal injuries to the baby. Always deac-tivate the passenger’s airbag whenplacing a child seat on the front seat.Move the passenger’s seat as far backas possible to avoid contact betweenthe cradle and the dashboard. Al-though this is not mandatory by law,the airbag should be immediately re-activated when children are no longercarried to ensure better protection toadults.
WARNING
To deactivate the passen-ger’s front air bag and the
Side Bag (where provided), refer toparagraphs “Digital display” and“Multifunctional display” in section“Dashboard and controls”.
WARNING
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 117
118
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
AR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
SIDE AIRBAGS
The car is fitted with front side bags fordriver and passenger (where provided) forprotecting the chest and window bags(where provided) for protecting front andrear passengers’ head.
Side bags (where provided) protect caroccupants from side crashes of medium-high severity, by placing the cushion be-tween the occupant and the internal partsof the side structure of the car.
Non-activation of side bags in other typesof collisions (front collisions, rear shunts,roll-overs, etc...) is not a system malfunc-tion.
In case of side crash, an electronic controlunit, when required triggers the inflationof the cushion. The cushion immediatelyinflates, placing itself as a protection, be-tween the occupant’s body and the struc-ture that could cause injuries. Immediate-ly after, the cushion deflates.
Side bags (where provided) are not a re-placement of but complementary to thebelts, which you are recommended to al-ways wear, as specified by law in Europeand most non-European countries.
FRONT SIDE BAGS - CHESTAND PELVIS ZONEPROTECTION fig. 16(where provided)
Front side bags are housed in the seat backrests, they consist of an instant inflationcushion designed to increase protectionof the occupants’ chest and pelvis zone inthe event of a side crash of medium-highseverity.
SIDE WINDOW BAGS - HEADPROTECTION fig. 17 (where provided)
They consist of two “drop-down” cush-ions, one on the right and the other on theleft side of the car, located behind the sidecoverings of the roof and covered byproper finishing.
Window bags have been designed for pro-tecting the head of front and rear occu-pants in the event of side crash, thanks tothe wide cushion inflation surface.
IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, allowing thus a correct window bagunfolding.
fig. 16 F0R0153m fig. 17 F0R0102m
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 118
119
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARW
ARNI
NGLIG
HTS A
NDME
SSAG
ES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
IMPORTANT The front air bags and/orside bags may be deployed if the car is sub-ject to heavy knocks or accidents involv-ing the underbody area, such as for ex-ample violent shocks, against steps, kerbsor low obstacles, falling of the car in bigholes or sags in the road.
IMPORTANT A small amount of dust willbe released when the airbags are de-ployed. The dust is not harmful and doesnot indicate the beginning of a fire. Fur-thermore, the surface of the deployed bagand the interior of the car may be coveredin a dusty residue: this dust may irritatethe skin and the eyes. Wash with mildsoap and water in the event of exposure.
The expiration date of the explosivecharge and the clock wire are shown on aspecific label contained in the oddmentcompartment. Go to a Fiat Dealershipto have the devices replaced when the ex-piration date approaches.
IMPORTANT Should an accident occur inwhich any of the safety devices is activat-ed, take the car to a Fiat Dealership tohave the devices activated replaced and tohave the system checked.
All inspection, repair and replacement op-erations concerning the air bags must on-ly be carried out c/o Fiat Dealership.
If you are having the car scrapped, havethe air bag system deactivated at a FiatDealership first. If the car changes own-ership, the new owner must be informedof the method of use of air bags and theabove warnings and also be given this“Owner’s Handbook”.
IMPORTANT Pretensioners, front airbagsand front side bags are deployed accord-ing to different logics on the basic of thetype of collision. Non deployment of oneof the devices does not therefore indicatea system fault.
Never rest head, arms andelbows on the door, on the
windows and in the window bag areato prevent possible injuries during in-flation phase.
WARNING
Never lean head, arms andelbows out of window.
WARNING
GENERAL WARNINGS
If when turning the key toMAR the warning light ¬
does not turn on or if it stays on whentravelling (together with the messageon the multifunctional display, whereprovided) there could be a failure insafety systems; in this event air bagsor pretensioners could not trigger incase of impact or, in a minor numberof cases, they could trigger acciden-tally. Contact Fiat Dealership imme-diately to have the system checked.
WARNING
Do not cover the backrest offront and rear seats with
trims or covers that are not suitableto be used with side bags.
WARNING
Never travel with objects onyour lap, in front of your
chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be-tween your lips; injury may result inthe event of the air bag being trig-gered.
WARNING
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 119
120
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
AR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TY
DEVI
CES
Always drive holding yourhands on the steering wheel
rim so that the airbag can inflatefreely in the case of need. Do not dri-ve with your body bent forward. Keepyour back straight against the backrest.
WARNING
Airbags may be deployed ifanother vehicle crashes if the
key is inserted and at MAR also if theengine is not running and the car isstationary. For this reason, childrenmust never sit on the front seat, evenif the car is not moving. On the oth-er hand, if the key is inserted and atSTOP, none of the safety devices(airbag or pretensioners) will be de-ployed in a collision. Non deploymentof the devices in this case does not in-dicate a system fault.
WARNING
Do not wash the seats withpressurised water or steam
(by hand or in automatic seat wash-ing stations).
WARNING
The airbag deploymentthreshold is higher than that
of the pretensioners. For collisions inthe range between the two thresh-olds, it is normal for only the preten-sioners to be activated.
WARNING
Do not hook rigid objects tothe coat hooks and to the
support handles.
WARNING
Airbags do not replace seatbelts but increase their effi-
ciency. Furthermore, since frontairbags are not deployed in low speedcollisions, side collisions, rear-endshunts or roll-overs, the occupants areonly protected by the seat belts whichmust be fastened at all times.
WARNING
When the key is turned toMAR warning light F (with
passenger front airbag activate) willblink for a few seconds to remind youthat the airbag will be deployed in theevent of a collision after which itshould go out.
WARNING
Have the airbag systemchecked by a Fiat Dealership
if the car was stolen, if theft was at-tempted, or if the car was subjectedto vandalism or flooding.
WARNING
103-120 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 120
121
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
AR
ENGINE STARTING ........................................................... 122
PARKING................................................................................ 125
USING THE MANUAL GEARBOX ................................. 126
CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS................................. 127
SNOW TYRES ....................................................................... 131
SNOW CHAINS ................................................................... 131
CAR INACTIVITY ............................................................... 132
CCCCOOOORRRRRRRREEEECCCCTTTT UUUUSSSSEEEE OOOOFFFF TTTTHHHHEEEE CCCCAAAARRRR
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 121
122
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
ARENGINE STARTING
The car is provided with an electronic en-gine lock device: refer to “The Fiat CODEsystem” paragraph in “Dashboard andcontrols” if you cannot start the engine.
The engine may be noisier during the firstseconds of operation, particularly after along period of inactivity. This is charac-teristic of hydraulic tappets, the timing sys-tem chosen to reduce the number of ser-vicing interventions and does effects nei-ther functionality nor reliability.
It is advisable not to demandmaximum performance fromyour car (e.g. excessive accel-erations, long distances at top
rpm, excessive intense braking, etc.) assoon as the engine is started.
Do not leave the key in the ig-nition switch with the engineoff to avoid unnecessary con-sumption of electricity which
could drain the battery. It is dangerousto run the engine in closed environ-ments.
Running the engine in con-fined areas is extremely dan-
gerous. The engine consumes oxygenand produces carbon monoxidewhich is a highly toxic and lethal gas.
WARNING
Remember that the brakebooster and power steering
are not operational until the enginehas been started, therefore much ef-fort than usual is required on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.
WARNING
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR PETROL VERSIONS
Proceed as follows:
❒ ensure that the handbrake is up;
❒ put the gear lever into neutral;
❒ press the clutch pedal down to thefloor without touching the accelerator;
❒ turn the ignition key to AVV and letit go the moment the engine starts.
If the engine does not start at the first at-tempt, return the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 122
123
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
AR
If, when the ignition key is at MAR, the in-strument panel warning light Y remainslit together with warning light U turn thekey to STOP and then back to MAR; re-main on, try with the other keys provid-ed with the car.
IMPORTANT if Y on the instrumentpanel remains on and steady, go to a FiatDealership immediately.
IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyto MAR when the engine is off.
STARTING PROCEDURE FORDIESEL VERSIONS
Proceed as follows:
❒ ensure that the handbrake is up;
❒ put the gear lever into neutral;
❒ turn the ignition key to MAR; instru-ment panel warning lights m and Ywill light up;
❒ wait for the warning light Y e mtoturn off. The hotter the engine is, thequicker this will happen;
❒ press the clutch pedal down to thefloor without touching the accelerator;
❒ turn the ignition key to AVV as soonas warning light m goes out. Waitingtoo long will waste the work done bythe glow plugs. Release the key as soonas the engine starts.
If the engine does not start at the first at-tempt, return the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.
If, when the ignition key is at MAR , theinstrument panel warning light Y re-mains lit together with warning light mturn the key to STOP and then back toMAR; if the warning lights remain on, trywith the other keys provided with the car.
IMPORTANT If the instrument panelwarning light Y stays on glowingsteadily, contact immediately Fiat Deal-ership.
IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyto MAR when the engine is off.
Warning light m will blinkfor 60 seconds after startingor during prolonged crankingto indicate a fault to the glow
plug heating system. Use the car nor-mally if the engine starts and go to aFiat Dealership as soon as possible.
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 123
124
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
ARSTOPPING THE ENGINE
Turn the ignition to STOP while the en-gine is idling.
IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, youshould allow the engine to “catch itsbreath” before turning it off by letting itidle to allow the temperature in the en-gine compartment to fall.
A quick burst on the acceler-ator before turning off the en-gine serves absolutely nopractical purpose, it wastes
fuel and is damaging especially to tur-bocharged engines.
HOW TO WARM UP THEENGINE AFTER IT HAS JUSTSTARTED (petrol and diesel engines)
Proceed as follows:
❒ drive off slowly, letting the engine turnat medium revs. Do not accelerateabruptly;
❒ do not demand to performance for thefirst few kilometres. Wait until the en-gine coolant gauge starts moving.
Remember that the brakebooster and power steeringare not operational until theengine has been started,
therefore much effort than usual is re-quired on the brake pedal and steeringwheel.
Never jump start the engineby pushing, towing or drivingdownhill. This could cause aflow of fuel into the catalyt-
ic converter and damage it beyond re-pair.
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 124
125
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
AR
HANDBRAKE fig. 1
The handbrake lever is located betweenthe two front seats.
Pull the lever upwards to operate thehandbrake. Four or five notches are nor-mally sufficient to lock the car on flat ter-rain, while nine or ten may be necessaryon a steep slope with the car loaded.
IMPORTANT If this is not the case, con-tact Fiat Dealership to have the handbrakeadjusted.
When the handbrake lever is pulled upand the ignition key is at MAR, the in-strument panel warning light x will turnon.
PARKING THE CAR
Proceed as follows:
❒ stop the engine and engage the hand-brake;
❒ engage a gear (on a slope, engage firstgear if the car is faced uphill or reverseif it is faced downhill) and leave thewheels steered.
If the car is parked on a steep slope, it isfurther advisable to block the wheels witha wedge or stone. Do not leave the key inthe ignition switch to prevent draining thebattery. Always remove the key when youleave the car.
Never leave children unat-tended in the car. Always re-
move the ignition key when leavingthe car and take it out with you.
WARNING
fig. 1 F0R0103m
Proceed as followed to release the hand-brake:
❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press re-lease button A;
❒ hold button A pressed and lower thelever. Warning light x on the instru-ment panel will go out.
Press the brake pedal when carrying outthis operation to prevent the car frommoving accidentally.
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 125
126
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
ARUSING THE MANUALGEARBOX
To engage the gears, press the clutch ped-al fully and shift the gear lever into one ofthe required positions (the diagram isshown on the knob fig. 2-3).
IMPORTANT Reverse may only be en-gaged when the car is at a standstill. Withthe engine running, wait for at least 2 sec-onds with the clutch pedal fully pressedbefore engaging reverse to prevent dam-age to the gears and grating.
Version 1.4: to engage reverse R from neu-tral position, lift the sliding ring A underthe knob and shift the lever rightwards andthen back fig. 2.
Version 1.3 Multijet: to engage reverse Rfrom neutral position, shift the lever right-wards and then back fig. 2.
fig. 2 - 1.4 version F0R0154m
Press the clutch pedal fullyto change gears correctly.
For this reason, there must be no ob-stacles on the floor under the pedals:make sure that mat are always flatand do not interfere with the pedals.
WARNING
Do not drive with your handresting on the gear lever asthe force exerted, even ifslight, could lead over time to
premature wear on the gearbox inter-nal components.
IMPORTANT The clutch pedal must beused for gear shift only. Never drive withthe foot resting, even if slightly, on theclutch pedal. For versions / markets whereapplicable, the clutch pedal control elec-tronics can intervene interpreting thewrong drive style as a fault.
fig. 3 - 1.3 Multijet version F0R0105m
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 126
127
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
AR
Roof rack/ski rack
Remove the roof rack or the ski rack fromthe roof after use. These accessories de-crease aerodynamic penetration of the carand have a negative effect on consumption.It is better to use a trailer to transportparticularly bulky objects.
Electric devices
Use electric devices only for the amountof time needed. Rear heated window, ad-ditional headlights, windscreen wipers andheater fan need a considerable amount ofenergy, therefore increasing the require-ment of current increases fuel consump-tion (up to +25% in the urban cycle).
Climate control
The climate control system requires high-er fuel consumption (up to +20% in av-erage): use the air vents when the exter-nal temperature allows to.
Spoilers
The use of non-certified aerodynamicitems may adversely affect air drag andconsumption levels.
DRIVING STYLE
Starting
Do not warm the engine up with the carstanding: the engine warms up very slow-ly in these conditions, increasing con-sumption and emissions. It is advisable tostart off immediately and slowly keepingthe engine speed down: the engine willwarm up much faster this way.
Unnecessary actions
Avoid revving up when starting at trafficlights or before stopping the engine. Thelatter action, like doubling the clutch, is un-necessary and causes increase of con-sumption and pollution.
Gear selection
Use a higher gear as soon as traffic androad conditions allow. Using a low gearfor faster acceleration will increase con-sumption.
In the same way improper use of a highgear increases consumption, emissions anengine wear.
CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS
Here are some suggestions which mayhelp you to keep the running costs of yourcar down and lower the amount of toxicemissions released into the atmosphere.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Car maintenance
Have checks and adjustments carried outin accordance with the “Service schedule”.
Tyres
Check tyre pressure regularly at leastonce every four weeks: excessively lowpressure will increase consumption be-cause rolling resistance will be higher.
Unnecessary loads
Do not travel with too much luggagestowed in the boot. The weight of the car(especially when driving in town) and itstrim greatly affects consumption and sta-bility.
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 127
128
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
ARCONDITIONS OF USE
Cold starting
Short distances and frequent cold start-upswill prevent the engine from reaching op-timal running temperature. Consequently,both consumption (from +15 to +30% onurban cycle ) and emissions will increase.
Traffic and road conditions
Rather high consumption is caused byheavy traffic, for instance when travellingin a queue with frequent use of low gearsor in cities with many traffic lights. Moun-tain and rough roads also have a negativeeffect on consumption.
Traffic hold-ups
During prolonged hold-ups (level crossings)the engine should be switched off.
TOWING TRAILERS
IMPORTANT NOTES
The car must be provided with a type-ap-proved tow hitch and adequate electricalsystem to tow caravans or trailers. Instal-lation must be performed by specialisedpersonnel who will issue the required pa-pers for travelling on roads.
Install any specific and/or additional rear-view mirrors as specified by law.
Remember that when towing a trailer,steep hills are harder to climb, the brak-ing spaces increase and overtaking takeslonger depending on the overall weight.
Engage a low gear when driving downhill,rather than constantly using the brake.
The weight of the trailer on the car’s towhitch will reduce the loading capacity ofthe car by the same amount. Consider theweight of the car at full load, including ac-cessories and luggage to make sure you donot exceed the maximum towable weight(shown on the log book).
Top speed
Fuel consumption considerably increasesas speed increases. Keep your speed aseven as possible, avoiding unnecessarybraking and acceleration which cause ex-cessive fuel consumption and increaseemissions.
Acceleration
Sudden acceleration has a very negativeeffect on consumptions and emissions: ac-celerate gradually and do not go over themaximum torque ratio.
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 128
129
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
AR
INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fastened tothe body by specialised personnel accord-ing to any additional and/or integrative in-formation supplied by the Manufacturer ofthe device.
The towing device must meet current reg-ulations with reference to 94/20/EEC Directive and subsequent amendments.
For any version the towing device usedmust match the towable weight of the caron which it is to be installed.
For the electric connection a unified con-nector should be used which is generallyplaced on a special bracket normally fas-tened to the towing device, and a specialECU for external trailer light control shallbe installed on the car.
For the electrical connection, 7 or 13 pin12VDC connection is to be used (CU-NA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Followthe instructions provided by the car man-ufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufac-turer.
An electric brake should be supplied di-rectly by the battery through a cable witha cross section of no less than 2.5 mm2.
IMPORTANT Electric brake or other de-vice shall be used with running engine.
In addition to the electrical branches, thecar’s electric system can only be con-nected to the supply cable for an electricbrake and to the cable for an internal light,though not above 15W.
For connections use the preset controlunit with battery cable no less than 2.5mm2.
Respect the speed limits specific for eachcountry for vehicles towing trailers. In allcases, the top speed must not exceed 100km/h.
Fit a suitable towing stabilizer to the trail-er to be towed.
The ABS with which the carmay be equipped will not
control the braking system of thetrailer. Particular caution is requiredon slippery roads.
WARNING
Never modify the brakingsystem of the car to control
the trailer brake. The trailer brakingsystem must be fully independentfrom the hydraulic system of the car.
WARNING
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 129
130
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
ARAssembly diagram fig. 3
The tow hook structure must be fastenedin the points shown by the symbol Ø us-ing a total of 6 M8 screws and 2 M10screws.
The internal back plates are to be at least6 mm thick.
The hook should be fastened to the bodyavoiding any type of drilling and trimmingof the rear bumpers that remains visiblewhen the hook is removed.
IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten alabel (plainly visible) of suitable size andmaterial with the following wording:
MAX LOAD ON BALL 70 kg
After fitting, screw holesshall be sealed to prevent ex-
haust gas inlet.
WARNING
fig. 3 F0R0190m
Existing hole
Exist
ing
scre
w
To lo
ad
Exist
ing
scre
wEx
istin
g sc
rew
Existing screw
Existing screw
Existing hole
Type-approved ball
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 130
131
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
AR
IMPORTANT When snow tyres are usedwith a max speed index below the onethat can be reached by the car (increasedby 5%), place a notice in the passenger’scompartment, plainly in the driver’s viewwhich states the max permissible speed ofthe snow tyres (as per EC Directive).
All four tyres should be the same (brandand track) to ensure greater safety whendriving and braking and better driveability.
Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.
SNOW CHAINS
Use of snow chains should be in compli-ance with local regulations.
The snow chains may be applied only on-to the front wheel tyres (drive wheels).Use of Lineaccessori Fiat snow chains isrecommended.
Check the tension of the chains after thefirst few metres have been driven.
IMPORTANT With snow chains, use theaccelerator with extreme care to preventor to limit as much as possible slipping ofthe driving wheels that could cause chainbreaking resulting in damages to the carbody or mechanical components.
IMPORTANT Use low-clearance 9 mmsnow chains.
SNOW TYRES
Use snow tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided with the car.
Fiat Dealership will be happy to provideadvice concerning the most suitable typeof tyre for the customer’s requirements.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of snowtyres, follow the instructions given in para-graph “Wheels” in section “Technicalspecifications”.
The performance of these tyres is con-siderably reduced when the tread depthis less than 4 mm. Replace them in thiscase.
Due to their specific features, the perfor-mance of snow tyres is much lower thanthat of normal types in normal conditionsor long motorway stretches. Limit per-formance according the use for which theywere approved.
The max speed for snowtyres with “Q” marking is
160 km/h; 190 km/h for tyres with “T”marking and 210 km/h for tyres withH marking. The Road Traffic Codespeed limits must however be alwaysstrictly observed.
WARNING
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 131
132
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF
THE C
ARCAR INACTIVITY
If the car is to be left inactive for longerthan a month, the following precautionsshould be noted:
❒ park the car in covered, dry and if pos-sible well-ventilated premises;
❒ engage a gear;
❒ check that the handbrake is not en-gaged;
❒ disconnect the negative battery termi-nal and check battery charge (see para-graph “Charge level check” in chapter“Maintenance and care”). Repeat thischeck once every three months dur-ing storage. Recharge the battery if nec-essary (see paragraph “If the battery isflat” in chapter “In an emergency”);
❒ clean and protect the painted parts us-ing protective wax;
❒ clean and protect the shiny metal partsusing special compounds readily avail-able;
❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubberwindscreen and rear window wiperblades and lift them off the glass;
❒ slightly open the windows;
❒ cover the car with a fabric or perfo-rated plastic terrapin. Do not use com-pact plastic sheets which do not allowhumidity to evaporate from the surfaceof the car;
❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the nor-mal specified pressure and check it atintervals;
❒ if you don’t disconnect the battery fromthe electric system, check its chargeevery month (see paragraph “Chargelevel check” in chapter “Maintenanceand care”);
❒ recharge the battery if necessary (seeparagraph “If the battery is flat” in chap-ter “In an emergency”);
❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.
IMPORTANT Where relevant, switch offthe car alarm with the remote control.
Keep your speed down whensnow chains are fitted. Donot exceed 50 km/h. Avoidpotholes, steps and pave-ments and avoid also to dri-ve for long distances on
roads not covered with snow to pre-vent damaging the car and theroadbed.
WARNING
Chains cannot be applied totyre 205/45 R17 88V.
WARNING
121-132 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:30 Pagina 132
133
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
GENERAL WARNINGS ..................................................... 134
LOW BRAKE FLUID ............................................................ 134
HANDBRAKE ON................................................................ 134
AIR BAG FAILURE................................................................ 135
HOTENGINE COOLANT ........................................................... 135
LOW BATTERY CHARGE ................................................. 136
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.......................................... 136
INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING.................................... 137
SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED.......................................... 137
EBD SYSTEM FAILURE ........................................................ 137
INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE (DIESEL VERSIONS) ............................................................ 138
EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE (PETROL VERSIONS) ......... 138
FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DEACTIVATED........... 139
ABS SYSTEM FAILURE......................................................... 139
FUEL RESERVE....................................................................... 139
GLOW PLUG WARMING ................................................ 140
GLOW PLUG WARMING FAILURE ............................... 140
WATER IN DIESEL FUEL FILTER ..................................... 140
FIAT CODE PROTECTION SYSTEM FAILURE.................................................................. 140
EXTERNAL LIGHTS FAILURE........................................... 141
REAR FOG LIGHTS.............................................................. 141
GENERIC FAILURE INDICATION ................................. 141
ESP SYSTEM FAILURE ........................................................ 142
BRAKE PAD WEAR ............................................................ 142
PARKING SENSOR FAILURE ............................................ 143
SIDELIGHTS AND LOW BEAMS ..................................... 143
FOLLOW ME HOME........................................................... 143
FRONT FOG LIGHTS ........................................................ 143
LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR........................ 143
RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR.................... 143
CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................ 143
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS............................................... 143
POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD ........... 144
LIMITED RANGE ................................................................. 144
ASR SYSTEM ......................................................................... 144
WWWWAAAARRRRNNNNIIIINNNNGGGG LLLLIIIIGGGGHHHHTTTTSSSS AAAANNNNDDDD MMMMEEEESSSSSSSSAAAAGGGGEEEESSSS
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 133
134
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
WARNING LIGHTSAND MESSAGES
GENERAL WARNINGSLighting of a warning light is associated toa specific message and/or buzzer when ap-plicable. These indications are brief andprecautionary and as such must non beconsidered as exhaustive and/or alterna-tive to the information contained in theOwner’s Handbook, which you are rec-ommended to read carefully in all cases.Refer to the information in this chap-ter in the event of a failure indication.IMPORTANT Failure indications on thedisplay fall into either of two categories:serious faults and less serious faults.Very serious failures are indicated by arepeated and prolonged warning “cycle”.Less serious failures are indicated by a lim-ited warning “cycle”.Press MENU ESC to stop the warningcycle in both cases. The warning light onthe instrument panel will stay on until thecause of the fault is eliminated.
LOW BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL (red)
HANDBRAKE ON (red)
Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter few seconds.
Low brake fluid level
The warning light turns on when the lev-el of the brake fluid in the reservoir fallsbelow the minimum level, due to possi-ble leak in the circuit.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
x
If the warning light x turnson when travelling (on cer-
tain versions together with the mes-sage on the display) stop the car im-mediately and contact Fiat Dealer-ship.
WARNING
Handbrake on
The warning light turns on when the hand-brake is on.
On certain versions, if the car is movingthe buzzer will also sound.
IMPORTANT If the warning light turns onwhen travelling, check that the handbrakeis not engaged.
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 134
135
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
AIR BAG FAILURE (red)
Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.
The warning light stays on steady if thereis a failure in the airbag system.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
¬ If when turning the key toMAR the warning light ¬
does not turn on or if it stays on whentravelling (together with the messageon the multifunctional display, whereprovided) there could be a failure insafety systems; in this event air bagsor pretensioners may not be deployedin case of impact or, in a minor num-ber of cases, they be deployed acci-dentally. Contact Fiat Dealership im-mediately to have the system checked.
WARNING
Failure of warning light ¬(warning light off) is indicat-
ed by warning light F which willblink for longer than the normal 4seconds indicating that the front pas-senger airbag is off.
WARNING
HOT ENGINECOOLANT (red)
Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.
The warning light turns on when the en-gine is overheated.
If the warning light comes on, proceed asfollows:
❒ during normal travel: stop the car,stop the engine and check that the wa-ter level in the vessel is not under theMIN line. In this case, wait for a fewminutes for the engine to cool downwhen slowly and carefully open thecap, top-up with coolant and checkthat the level is between the MIN andMAX references on the vessel itself.Also check for leakages. Go to a FiatDealership if the warning should comeon when the engine is started again.
ç
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 135
136
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
LOW ENGINE OILPRESSURE (red)
Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go out as soon as the engine isstarted.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
v
If the warning light vturns on when the car is trav-
elling (on certain versions togetherwith the message on the display) stopthe engine immediately and contacta Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
❒ In the case of demanding use (e.g.towing trailers uphill or car at fullload): slow down and stop the car ifthe warning light stays on. Stand for2 or 3 minutes with the engine runningand slightly accelerated to promote abetter circulation of coolant. Thenstop the engine. Check correct liquidlevel as described above.
IMPORTANT Under severe use of thecar, keep the engine on and slightly accel-erated for few minutes before switching itoff.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
LOW BATTERYCHARGE (red)
Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go out as soon as the engine isstarted (with the engine running at idlespeed a brief delay in going out is allowed).
Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if thewarning light stays on either steady orblinking.
w
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 136
137
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INCOMPLETE DOORLOCKING (red)
On certain versions the warn-ing light turns on when one or moredoors or the tailgate are not properlyshut.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
A buzzer will sound when doors/tailgateare open and the car is moving.
´EBD FAILURE(red) (amber)
Warning lights x and > lit at the sametime with the engine running indicates anEBD system failure or that the system isnot available. Early locking of the rearwheels may occur in the event of violentbraking causing the car to swerve. Drivevery carefully to a Fiat Dealership to havethe system inspected.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
x >SEAT BELTS NOTFASTENED (red)
The warning light on the displaywill light up when the car is moving and thedriver’s seat belt is not correctly fastened.The warning light will blink and a buzzer willsound if the front seat belts are not cor-rectly fastened. The buzzer of the S.B.R.(Seat Belt Reminder) system may only beswitched off by a Fiat Dealership. On someversions the system may be reactivatedfrom the setup menu.
<
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 137
138
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
Go to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible if warninglight U either does not lightup when the key is turned to
MAR to if while travelling the warninglights comes on either steady or blink-ing (along with a message on the dis-play). The operation of warning lightU may be checked by the traffic po-lice using specific devices. Follow thelaws in force in the country where youare driving.
If the light flashes, release the acceleratorpedal to lower the speed of the engine un-til the warning light stops flashing; contin-ue the journey at moderate speed, tryingto avoid driving conditions that may causefurther flashing and contact Fiat Dealer-ship as soon as possible.
EOBD ENGINE CONTROLSYSTEM FAILURE
Under normal conditions, turning the ig-nition key to MAR, the warning light turnson but it should go off after engine starting.This indicates that the warning light isworking correctly. If the warning light ei-ther stays on or comes on while travelling:
❒ steady light: a fault in the supply/ignitionsystem which could cause high emis-sions at the exhaust, possible lack ofperformance, poor handling and highconsumption levels.
On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.
In these conditions, you may continuetravelling at moderate speed without de-manding excessive effort from the engine.Prolonged use of the car with the warn-ing light on may cause damage. Go to aFiat Dealership as soon as possible. Ifwarning light will go out after the faultgoes away but it will be stored in the sys-tem.
❒ blinking: indicates the possibility ofdamage to the catalyser (see “EOBDsystem” in section “Dashboard andcontrols”).
INJECTION SYSTEMFAILURE(Multijet versions - amber)
EOBD SYSTEMFAILURE (petrolversions - amber)
Injection system failure
Under normal conditions, turning the ig-nition key to MAR, the warning light turnson but it should go off after engine start-ing.
If the warning light stays on or turns onwhen travelling, means a fault in the sup-ply/ignition system which could cause highemissions at the exhaust, possible lack ofperformance, poor handling and high con-sumption levels.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
In these conditions, you may continuetravelling at moderate speed without de-manding excessive effort from the engine.Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-ble.
U
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 138
139
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
KFUEL RESERVE (amber)
Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.
The warning light turns on when about 7litres fuel are left in the tank.
IMPORTANT The warning light will blinkto indicate a system failure. Go to a FiatDealership to have the system checked.
ABS SYSTEM FAILURE(amber)
Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.
The warning light will light up when thesystem is either not working or not avail-able. In the case, the braking system willwork as normal without the extra poten-tials offered by the ABS system. Drivecarefully and go to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
>FFRONT PASSENGERAIRBAGDEACTIVATED(amber)
Warning light F comes on when frontpassenger’s airbag is deactivated.
With front passenger’s airbag on, turningthe ignition key to MAR, warning lightF comes on steadily for about 4 sec-onds, it flashes for other 4 seconds andthen it shall go off.
Warning light F indicatesfailure of warning light ¬.
This condition is indicated by inter-mittent blinking of warning light Ffor longer than 4 seconds. In this case,warning light ¬ may not indicatefault to the system. Contact FiatDealership immediately to have thesystem checked before driving off.
WARNING
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 139
140
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
GLOW PLUGWARMING (Multijet versions - amber)
GLOW PLUGWARMING FAILURE (Multijet versions - amber)
Glow plug warming
The warning light will go on when the keyis turned to MAR. It will go out as soonas the glow plugs have reached a prede-termined temperature. Start the engine assoon as the warning light goes out.
IMPORTANT With hot ambient temper-ature, warning light stays on for very shorttime.
Glow plug warming failure
The warning light will blink in the eventof a failure to the glow plug heating sys-tem. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon aspossible.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
m
WATER IN DIESELFUEL FILTER (Multijet versions - amber)
Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter few seconds.
The warning light turns on when there iswater in the diesel fuel filter.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
c
The presence of water in thefeeding circuit may cause se-vere damage to the injectionsystem and irregular engine
operation. If warning light c lights up(on some versions with the message onthe display), go to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible to have the systembled. Water may have been introducedin the tank if this appears immediate-ly after refuelling: in this case, stop the engine immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership.
CAR PROTECTIONSYSTEM FAILURE -FIAT CODE (amber)
Turning the key to MAR the warning lightshall flash only once and then go off.
If with the ignition key at MAR, the warn-ing light stays on, this indicates a possiblefailure (see “Fiat Code system” in section“Dashboard and controls”).
IMPORTANT Warning lights U and Ywill come on at the same time to indicatea Fiat CODE system failure.
If with the engine running the warning lightY flashes, this means that the car is notprotected by the engine inhibitor device(see “Fiat Code system” in section “Dash-board and controls”).
Contact Fiat Dealership to have all the keystored.
Y
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 140
141
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
GENERIC FAILUREINDICATION (amber)
The warning light turns on in the follow-ing circumstances.
Engine oil pressure sensor failureThe warning light turns on when failure isdetected in parking sensors. Go to a FiatDealership to have the fault fixed as soonas possible.
External light fault (where provided)
See description of warning light 6.
Fuel cut-off switch trippedThe warning light comes on when the fu-el cut-off switch trips.
The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.
èEXTERNAL LIGHTFAILURE (amber)
The warning light will come on(some versions only) when a fault
to one of the following lights is detected:
– side/taillights
– brake lights
– rear fog lights
– direction indicators
– number plate lights.
The fault may be caused by: one or moreburnt lamps, a blow protection fuse or in-terruption of the electrical connection.
On certain versions warning light ècomes on instead.
On certain versions the dedicated messageis displayed.
W
REAR FOG LIGHTS(amber)
The warning light comes onwhen the rear fog lights are turned on.
4
Rain sensor failure (where provided)The warning light comes on when a rainsensor failure is detected. Go to a FiatDealership.The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.
Parking sensor failure (where provided)See description of warning light t.
Speed limit exceeded (where provided)
The display will show the dedicated mes-sage when the car exceeds the set speedlimit (see “Multifunctional Display” in sec-tion “Dashboard and controls”).
Diesel filter failure (where provided)The warning light will come on when adiesel filter system failure is detected. Thedisplay will show the dedicated message(where provided).
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 141
142
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
ESP SYSTEM FAILURE (amber)
HILL HOLDER FAILURE (amber)
ESP system failure
Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter few seconds.
If the warning light does not go off or stayson when travelling together with the but-ton led ASR OFF, contact Fiat Dealer-ship.
On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.
Note Warning light flashing when drivingindicates that the ESP system is active.
Hill Holder failure
Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter few seconds.
The warning light will come on when a HillHolder system failure is detected.
On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.
áBRAKE PAD WEAR(amber) (red)
The warning light on the dialturns on if the front brake pads are worn;in this case have them changed as soonas possible.
On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.
dDiesel particulate filter clogged(Multijet versions)
The warning light turns on when thediesel particulate filter is clogged and thedriving conditions do not enable to acti-vate automatically the regeneration pro-cedure.
To allow the regeneration procedure,keep the car running until the warning lightturns off.
The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 142
143
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
PARKING SENSORFAILURE (where provided) (amber)
The warning light turns on when failureis detected in parking sensors.
On certain versions warning light ècomes on instead.
Contact Fiat Dealership.
On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.
tSIDE/TAILLIGHTS AND LOW BEAMS(green)
FOLLOW ME HOME(green)
Side/taillights and low beams
The warning light turns on when side/tail-lights or low beams are turned on.
Follow me home
The warning light will turn when this de-vice is active (see “Follow me home” insection “Dashboard and controls”).
The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.
3
FRONT FOG LIGHTS(green) (where provided)
The warning light turns onwhen the front fog lights are turned on.
5
LEFT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATOR(green - intermittent)
The warning light turns on when the di-rection indicator control lever is moveddownwards or, together with the right in-dicator, when the hazard warning lightbutton is pressed.
F
RIGHT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATOR (green - intermittent)
The warning light turns on when the di-rection indicator control lever is movedupwards or, together with the left indica-tor, when the hazard warning light buttonis pressed.
D
CRUISE CONTROL(where provided) (green)
Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on, but itshould go off after few seconds.
The warning light turns on together withthe message on the display when turningthe knurled ring of the Cruise Control toON.
On certain versions the dedicated mes-sage is displayed.
Ü
MAIN BEAMS (blue)
The warning light turns onwhen the main beams are
turned on.
1
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 143
144
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
ASR SYSTEM (versions with multifunction display)
The ASR system can be turned off bypressing the button ASR OFF.
A dedicated message will appear on thedisplay to inform the driver that the sys-tem has been switched off. The LED onthe button will light up at the same time.
POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICEON THE ROAD (versions with multifunction display)
This indication starts flashing when theoutside temperature reaches or falls be-low 3°C to warn the driver of the possi-ble presence of ice on the road.
The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.
LIMITED RANGE (versions with multifunction display)
The display will show the dedicated mes-sage to warn the driver that the cruisingrange is less than 50 km.
Press ASR OFF again: the LED on thebutton will go out and a dedicated mes-sage will appear on the display to informuses that the system has been switchedback on.
133-144 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 144
145
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
STARTING THE ENGINE ................................................. 146
IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ............................................... 147
QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT FIX & GO automatic............................................................. 153
WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB ................... 158
IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT.......................... 160
IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT .......................... 165
IF A FUSE BLOWS................................................................ 168
IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT .................................................. 174
LIFTING THE CAR............................................................... 175
TOWING THE CAR ........................................................... 175
IIIINNNN AAAANNNN EEEEMMMMEEEERRRRGGGGEEEENNNNCCCCYYYY
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 145
146
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
STARTING THE ENGINE
EMERGENCY START-UP
Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if in-strument panel warning light Y comeson steady.
JUMP STARTING fig. 1
If the battery is flat, the engine may bestarted using an auxiliary battery with thesame capacity or a little higher than theflat one.
Proceed as follows to start the engine:
❒ connect positive terminals (+ near theterminal) of the two batteries with ajump lead;
❒ with a second lead, connect the nega-tive terminal (–) of the auxiliary batteryto an earthing point E on the engine orthe gearbox of the car to be started;
❒ start the engine;
❒ when the engine has been started, re-move the leads reversing the orderabove.
If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact the near-est Fiat Dealership.
This procedure must be per-formed by expert personnel
because incorrect actions may causeelectrical discharge of considerable in-tensity. Furthermore, battery fluid ispoisonous and corrosive: avoid contactwith your skin and eyes. Keep nakedflames away from the battery. Nosmoking. Do not cause sparks.
WARNING
fig. 1 F0R0242m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 146
147
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
IMPORTANT Never connect the negativeterminals of the two batteries directly:sparks could ignite explosive gas releasedfrom the battery. If the auxiliary battery isinstalled on another car, prevent acciden-tal contact between metallic parts of thetwo cars.
BUMP STARTING
Never jump start the engine by pushing,towing or driving downhill. This couldcause a flow of fuel into the catalytic con-verter and damage it beyond repair.
IMPORTANT Remember that the brakebooster and the power steering systemare not operating until the engine is start-ed, a greater effort will therefore be re-quired to press the brake pedal or turnthe steering wheel.
REPLACING A WHEEL
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Wheel changing and correct use of thejack and spare wheel call for some pre-cautions as listed below.
Indicate that the car is sta-tionary according to the laws
in force: hazard lights, triangle, etc.Passengers should leave the car, par-ticularly if it is very loaded and waitfor the wheel to be changed awayfrom on-coming traffic. Apply thehandbrake.
WARNING
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 147
148
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
The spare wheel is specificfor your car. Do not use it on
cars of different models. Do not usespare wheels of different models onyour car. The wheel bolts are specif-ic for your car. Do not use them oncares of different models. Do not usebolts of different models on your car.
WARNING
Repair and refit the standardwheel as soon as possible.
Do not apply grease to the boltthreading before assembly: the boltscould come loose unexpectedly.
WARNING
The jack may only be used toreplace wheels on the car
which it equips or other cars of thesame model. Never use the jack forother purposes, such as lifting othercar models. Never use the jack to car-ry out repairs under the car. Incorrectpositioning of the jack may cause thecar to fall. Do not use the jack forloads higher than those shown on thelabel.
WARNING
Incorrect wheel cup assem-bly may cause it to come off
when the car is travelling. Never tam-per with the inflation valve. Never in-troduce tools of any kind between rimand tyre. Check tyre and spare wheelpressure regularly referring to the val-ues shown in the “Technical Specifi-cations” chapter.
WARNING
Important notes:
❒ the jack weighs 1.76 kg;
❒ the jack requires no adjustment;
❒ the jack cannot be repaired: replacewith an original spare part if damaged;
❒ no tool other than its handle may be fit-ted on the jack.
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 148
149
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
To change a wheel proceed asfollows:
❒ stop the car in a position so that it isnot a danger for on-coming traffic andwhere you can replace the wheel safe-ly. The ground must be flat and com-pact;
❒ stop the engine off and pull up the hand-brake;
❒ engage first gear or reverse;
❒ wear the reflecting safety jacket (com-pulsory by law in certain countries) be-fore getting out of the car;
❒ open the tailgate and lift the mat;
❒ loosen the fastener A-fig. 2;
❒ take out the tool box C-fig. 2 and takeit near to the wheel to be changed;
❒ take the spare wheel B-fig. 2;
fig. 2 F0R0107m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 149
150
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
❒ loosen the bolts of the wheel to be re-placed by about one turn with thewrench provided E-fig. 3; if the car isfitted with alloy rims, shake the car tofacilitate removing the rim from thewheel hub; ❒ operate the device F-fig. 4 to extend
the jack until the top of the jack G-fig.4 fits correctly into catch H-fig. 4;
❒ warn anybody nearby that the car isabout to be lifted. They must stay clearand not touch the car until it is back onthe ground;
❒ fit the handle L-fig. 4 to operate thejack and lift the car until the wheel tobe changed is several centimetres offthe ground;
fig. 3 F0R0108m
fig. 4 F0R0155m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 150
151
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
❒ for versions with wheel cap, remove thewheel cap after loosening the 3 fasteningbolts and finally loosen the fourth bolt L-fig. 5 and extract the wheel;
❒ make sure the contact surfaces be-tween spare wheel and hub are cleanso that the fastening bolts will not comeloose;
❒ fit the spare wheel by inserting the firstbolt for two threads into the hole clos-est to the inflation valve;
❒ fit the wheel cap making the crescenthole coincide with the bolt you have fit-ted using the wrench;
❒ tighten the fastening bolts;
❒ turn the jack handle L-fig. 4 to lowerthe car and remove the jack;
❒ use the wrench provided to fasten thebolts completely in a criss-cross fashionas shown in fig. 6;
❒ if replacing a wheel with alloy rim, stoveit temporarily into the spare wheelcompartment with the cosmetic sidefacing upwards.
REFITTING THESTANDARD WHEEL
Following the procedure described previ-ously, raise the car and remove the sparewheel.
fig. 5 F0R0156m fig. 6 F0R0157m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 151
152
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
Versions with steel rims
Proceed as follows:
❒ make sure the contact surfaces be-tween spare wheel and hub are cleanso that the fastening bolts will not comeloose;
❒ fit the standard wheel by inserting thefirst bolt for two threads into the holeclosest to the inflation valve;
❒ fit the wheel cap making the lunettehole coincide with the bolt you have fit-ted then, fit the other 3 bolts;
❒ using the wrench provided, tighten thefastening bolts;
❒ lower the car and remove the jack;
❒ using the wrench provided, fully tight-en the bolts in the sequence shownpreviously in the figure.
Versions with alloy rims
Proceed as follows:
❒ insert the wheel on the hub and usingthe wrench provided tighten the bolts;
❒ lower the car and remove the jack;
❒ using the wrench provided, fully tight-en the bolts in the sequence shown inthe figure.
When you have finished
❒ stow the spare wheel in the space pro-vided in the boot;
❒ fit the jack partially open in its box C-fig. 2 forcing it lightly to prevent itfrom vibrating when travelling;
❒ put the tools back into their places inthe container;
❒ stow the container C-fig. 2, completewith tools in the spare wheel;
❒ tight the tool box fastener A-fig. 2;
❒ reposition the mat in the boot.
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 152
153
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
QUICK TYRE REPAIR KITFIX & GO automatic
The Fix & Go automatic quick tyre repairkit is placed in the boot under the mat.
The kit fig. 7 includes:
❒ cylinder A containing sealant and fittedwith:
– filling pipe B;
– an adhesive label C with the mes-sage “max. 80 km/h” to be apply ina position clearly visible by the dri-ver (on the dashboard) after repair-ing the tyre;
❒ instruction booklet (see fig. 8), to beused for prompt and proper use of thequick repair kit and to be then handedto the personnel charged with handlingthe treated tyre;
❒ compressor D-fig. 7 including gaugeand connections;
❒ a pair of protection gloves located inthe side space of the compressor;
❒ adapters for inflating different elements.
fig. 7 F0R0158m
The quick repair kit also contains a screw-driver and a tow ring.
fig. 8 F0R0159m
Hand over the instructionbooklet to the personnel
charged with treating the tyre re-paired with the kit.
WARNING
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 153
154
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
IMPORTANT INFORMATION:
The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repairkit is effective with external temperaturesbetween -20 °C and +50 °C.
The sealing fluid will expire.
Do not operate the com-pressor for longer than 20
consecutive minutes. Risk of over-heating. The quick repair kit is notsuitable for definitive repairs. Thetyres may only be repaired tem-porarily.
WARNING
In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, thekit may be used to repairtyres showing damages on the
track or shoulder up to max 4 mm di-ameter.
The kit cannot be used to re-pair damage to the tyre side-
wall. Do not use the quick repair kitif the tyre was damaged by runningon a flat.
WARNING
The damage cannot be re-paired with the kit if the
wheel rim is damaged (deformationof the channel causing leakage of air).Do not remove the foreign body(screw or nail) from the tyre.
WARNING
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 154
155
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
INFLATION PROCEDURE
The cylinder contains ethylglycol. Contains latex: may
cause an allergic reaction. Harmful ifswallowed. Irritant for the eye. Maycause sensitization by inhalation orcontact. Avoid contact with your eyes,skin and clothes. In the event of con-tact, wash immediately with plenty ofwater. Do not induce vomit if swal-lowed. Rinse your mouth and drinkplenty of water. Call a doctor imme-diately. Keep away from children. Theproduct must not be used by asth-matics. Do not breath in the vapoursduring insertion and suction. Call adoctor immediately if allergic reactionsare noted. Store the cylinder in thespecific compartment, away fromsources of heat. The sealing fluid willexpire.
WARNING Replace the cylinder contain-ing the sealant after the ex-piration date. Dispose of thecylinder and the sealant liq-
uid properly. Dispose according to thenational and local laws in force.
Put on the protection glovesprovided together with quick
tyre repair kit.
WARNING
❒ Apply the handbrake. Remove thetyre valve cap, extract the flexible fillertube A-fig. 9 and fasten the ring B on-to the tyre valve;
fig. 9 F0R0109m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 155
156
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
❒ make sure that switch D-fig. 10 of thecompressor is in position 0 (off), startthe engine, plug into the nearest sock-et E-fig. 11 and operate the compres-sor turning switch D-fig. 10 to positionI (on). Inflate the tyre to the pressurespecified in the “Inflation pressure”paragraph, “Technical Specifications”chapter.
For a more accurate reading, checkpressure gauge F-fig. 10 with thecompressor off;
❒ if after 5 minutes it is still impossibleto reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage com-pressor from valve and current outlet,then move the car forth for approx. tenmetres in order to distribute the seal-ing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then re-peat the inflation operation;
❒ If after this operation it is still impossi-ble after 5 minutes to reach at least 1.8bar, do not start driving since the tyreis excessively damaged and the quicktyre repair kit cannot guarantee suit-able sealing, contact Fiat Dealership;
❒ if reaching the tyre pressure specifiedin paragraph “Inflation pressure” in sec-tion “Technical Specifications”, startdriving immediately;
fig. 10 F0R0160m
fig. 11 F0R0113m
fig. 12 F0R0110m
Apply the adhesive label in aposition clearly visible by the
driver as a reminder that the tyre hasbeen treated with the quick repair kit.Drive carefully, particularly on bends.Do not exceed 80 km/h. Do not ac-celerate or brake suddenly.
WARNING
❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stopand check again the tyre pressure; pullup the handbrake;
Stop if the pressure hasdropped to less than 1.8
bars: the Fix & Go automatic quickrepair kit cannot work properly be-cause the tyre is excessively damaged.Go to a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 156
157
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
❒ if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, re-store proper pressure (with enginerunning and handbrake on) and restart;
❒ drive with the utmost care to the near-est Fiat Dealership.
FOR CHECKING ANDRESTORING PRESSURE ONLY
The compressor may also be used forrestoring pressure only. Release couplingA-fig. 14 and connect directly to the tyrevalve fig. 13. In this way, the cylinder willnot be connected to the compressor andno sealant will be injected.
CYLINDER REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE
To replace the cylinder proceed as fol-lows:
❒ release connection A-fig. 14;
❒ turn anticlockwise the cylinder to re-place and raise it;
❒ fit the new cylinder and turn it clock-wise;
❒ connect connection A to the cylinderand fit the transparent tube B into theproper space.
Remember to inform theworkshop that the tyre has
been treated with a quick repair kit.Give the instruction booklet to thetyre repair workshop personnel.
WARNING
fig. 13 F0R0111m fig. 14 F0R0161m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 157
158
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
❒ When a bulb is not working, check thatthe corresponding fuse is intact beforereplacing it: refer to the “If a fuseblows” paragraph in this chapter forfuse location.
❒ before changing a bulb check the con-tacts for oxidation;
❒ burnt bulbs must be replaced by othersof the same type and power;
❒ always check the height of the headlightbeam after changing a bulb, for reasonsof safety.
IMPORTANT A slight misting may appearon the internal surface of the headlight:this does not indicate a fault and is causedby low temperature and the degree of hu-midity in the air. Misting will rapidly dis-appear when the headlights are switchedon. The presence of drop inside the head-lights indicates infiltration of water. Go toa Fiat Dealership.
TYPES OF BULBS
Various types of bulbs are fitted to your car:
A All glass bulb: clipped into place. Pullto extract.
B Bayonet bulbs: to remove this typeof bulb from its holder, press thebulb and turn it anticlockwise.
C Cylindrical bulbs: release from thecontacts to extract.
D-E Halogen bulbs: release the fasteningclip from the corresponding seat toremove the lamp.
Halogen lamps must be han-dled holding the metallic partonly. Touching the transparentpart of the bulb with your fin-
gers may reduce the intensity of theemitted light and even compromise du-ration of the lamp itself. In the case ofaccidental contact, rub the lamp with acloth and spirit and leave to dry.
Modifications or repairs tothe electrical system (elec-
tronic control units) that are not car-ried out properly or do not take thetechnical specifications of the systeminto account can cause malfunctionsleading to the risk of fire.
WARNING
Halogen bulbs contain pres-surised gas which, if broken,
may cause small fragments of glass tobe projected outwards.
WARNING
fig. 15 F0R0112m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 158
159
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
Bulb Ref. figure Type Power
Main beam headlights
Dipped beam headlights
Front sidelights
Front fog lights (where provided)
Front direction indicators
Side direction indicators
Rear direction indicators
Side/taillights
Brake lights
Third brake light (additional brake light)
Reversing light
Rear fog lights
Number plate light
Front ceiling light with spot lights
Rear ceiling light with movable lens
Boot light
Puddle light
Courtesy light
Courtesy light
Oddments compartment courtesy light
H1U55W
H755W
W5W
H1U55W
PY21W
WY5W
Y21W
R5W
P21W
5W
P21W
P21W
W5W
10W x 2
10W
W5W
W5W
1.2W x 2
C5W
C5W
D
D
A
–
B
A
B
B
B
B
–
–
A
C
C
A
C
C
C
C
55W
55W
5W
55W
21W
5W
21W
5W
21W
5W
21W
21W
5W
10W
10W
5W
5W
1.2W
5W
5W
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 159
160
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHTBURNS OUT
For the type of bulb and power rating, see“When needing to change a bulb”.
FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERSfig. 16
The front light clusters contain sidelights,dipped beam, main beam and direction in-dicator bulbs.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light unitas follows:
A main beam
B side lights
C dipped beam (two lights)
D direction indicators.
SIDELIGHTS fig. 17
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove the clipped-on cover;
❒ press tabs B and remove the bulbholder;
❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;
❒ refit the bulb holder and refit the capand check that it is locked properly.
fig. 16
C B D
A
F0R0220m fig. 17 F0R0221m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 160
161
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 18
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove the clipped-on cover;
❒ disconnect the central electric connec-tor and release the bulb holder catch;
❒ remove the bulb B and replace it;
❒ fit the new bulb, making the outlines ofthe metallic part coincide with thegrooves on the reflector;
❒ refit the bulb holder catch and reconnectthe electrical connector;
❒ refit the protection and check that itis correctly locked.
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 19
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove the clipped-on cover;
❒ disconnect the central electric connec-tor and release the bulb holder catch;
❒ remove the bulb B and replace it;
❒ refit the new bulb;
❒ refit the bulb holder catch and reconnectthe electrical connector;
❒ refit the protection and check that itis correctly locked.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Front fig. 19/a
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ steer the right/left wheel outwards asshown in the figure;
❒ turn the catch as shown by the arrow,then use the lid;
❒ remove the bulb holder cover by turn-ing it anticlockwise;
fig. 18 F0R0222m fig. 19/a F0R0224mfig. 19 F0R0223m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 161
162
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
❒ extract the bulb D by pressing it slight-ly and turning it anticlockwise (bayonetlocking) then replace it;
❒ refit the cover/bulb holder C by turningit clockwise and locking it properly;
❒ close the lid and turn the fastening de-vice.
Side fig. 20
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ work on the lens A to compress the in-ternal catch B, then pull the unit out-wards;
❒ turn the bulb holder C anticlockwise,extract the clipped-on bulb D and re-place it;
❒ refit the bulb holder C in the lens andturn it clockwise;
❒ refit the unit making sure that the in-ternal catch B clips into position.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS (where provided)
Contact Fiat Dealership to have front foglights A-fig. 21 replaced.
REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS fig. 22-23Rear light cluster contain taillights, brakelight, direction indicators and rear fog lightbulbs. The bulbs are arranged inside thelight unit as follows:A brake lights (two lights)B taillightsC rear fog lightsD direction indicators E reversing light.
fig. 20 F0R0226m fig. 22
D
A B C
EF0R0227mfig. 21 F0R0114m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 162
163
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
fig. 23/a F0R0228m
fig. 24 F0R0230m
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❒ open the tailgate and loosen the two fastening screws G;
❒ disconnect the central electric connector and pull the lens unit out-wards;
❒ release the clips F and extract the bulb holders;
❒ remove the bulb to replace A, B, C or D pushing it slightly andturning it anticlockwise (bayonet-type bulb) and replace it;
❒ refit the bulb holder and refasten the clips F;
❒ to replace the rear fog light, release the clips H-fig. 24, removethe protection and replace the bayonet bulb.
❒ reconnect the electrical connector, reposition the cluster correct-ly on the body and then tighten the fastening screws G.
fig. 23/b F0R0229m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 163
164
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS
The change the bulb’s group proceed asfollows:
❒ open the tailgate;
❒ disconnect the electric connector A-fig. 25;
❒ unscrew the two laterals pivots B-fig. 25;
❒ extract the bulb hoder;
❒ remove and replace the bulbs fig. 26.
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT fig. 27-28
To change the bulb proceed as follows:❒ work in the point shown by the arrow
and remove lens A-fig. 27;❒ change the bulb fig. 28 releasing it from
the side contacts and making sure thenew bulb is correctly fastened betweenthe contacts;
❒ refit the snap-fitted lens unit.
fig. 25 F0R0252m fig. 26 F0R0253m fig. 27 F0R0123m
fig. 28 F0R0124m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 164
165
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
IF AN INTERIOR LIGHTBURNS OUT
For the type of bulb and power rating, see“When needing to change a bulb”.
FRONT CEILING LIGHT
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❒ work in the points shown by the ar-rows and remove light A-fig. 29;
❒ open the protection lid B-fig. 30;
❒ replace bulbs C releasing them from theside contacts; make sure that new bulbsare correctly clamped between contacts;
❒ re-close the lid B-fig. 30 and secure lightA-fig. 29 into its housing locking itproperly.
REAR CEILING LIGHT(where provided)
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❒ work in the points shown by the ar-rows and remove light D-fig. 31;
❒ open the protection lid E-fig. 32;
❒ change the bulb F-fig. 32 releasing itfrom the side contacts and making surethe new bulb is correctly fastened be-tween the contacts;
❒ re-close the protection lid E-fig. 32and secure light D-fig. 31 into its hous-ing locking it properly.
fig. 29 F0R0115m
fig. 30 F0R0117m
fig. 31 F0R0116m
fig. 32 F0R0118m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 165
166
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
COURTESY LIGHT fig. 33
To change the bulb proceed as follows:
❒ open the mirror cover A;
❒ extract lens B levering in the pointsshown by the arrow;
❒ delicately lift the bulb holder C from itsseat, extract the clipped-on bulb and re-place it;
❒ correctly reposition the bulb holder Cin its seat;
❒ refit the light B inserting it in its cor-rect position firstly on one end andthen on the other until it clicks intoplace.
BOOT LIGHT fig. 34
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:❒ open the tailgate;❒ remove the light A levering in the point
shown by the arrow;❒ open the protection B and replace the
snap-fitted bulb;❒ re-close the protective cover B on the
lens;❒ refit the light A inserting it in its cor-
rect position firstly on one end andthen on the other until it clicks intoplace.
fig. 33 F0R0233m fig. 34 F0R0234m fig. 35 F0R0120m
PUDDLE LIGHTS(where provided) fig. 35-36
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove the light by pressing clip A-fig. 35 with a screwdriver;
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 166
167
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
❒ press the bulb protection cover sides B-fig. 36 on the two fastening pins andturn it;
❒ replace the snap-fitted bulb C-fig. 36;
❒ refit bulb protection cover fitting thetwo fastening pins;
❒ refit the ceiling light inserting first endD-fig. 35 and then pressing the otherend until hearing the locking click of theclip.
fig. 36 F0R0121m
ODDMENTS COMPARTMENTCOURTESY LIGHT (where provided) figs. 37-38
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ work at the points shown by the ar-rows and remove the courtesy light A-fig. 37;
❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 38 releasing itfrom the side contacts and making surethe new bulb is correctly fastened be-tween the actual contacts;
❒ refit the courtesy light A-fig.37 in itshousing making sure that it is secure.
fig. 37 F0R0303m fig. 38 F0R0304m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 167
168
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
IF A FUSE BLOWS
GENERAL
The fuse is a protective device for theelectric system: it comes into action (i.e.it cuts off) mainly due to a fault or im-proper action on the system.
Check the efficiency of the correspondingfuse when a device does not work: theconducting element A-fig. 39 must not beinterrupted. If it is, replace the blown fusewith another with the same amperage(same colour).
B undamaged fuse
C fuse with damaged filament.
fig. 39 F0R0122m
Never replace a fuse withanother of higher amperage:
FIRE RISK.
WARNING
Never replace a blown fusewith metallic wires or othermaterial.
Go to a Fiat Dealership if ageneral protection fuse
blows (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE,MAXI-FUSE).
WARNING
If a fuse blows again, contacta Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
Remove the key from the ig-nition switch and switch off
all loads before replacing a fuse.
WARNING
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 168
169
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
FUSE LOCATION
The fuses are grouped in three units onthe dashboard, in the engine compartmentand on the positive battery terminal.
Fuse box on the dashboard fig. 41
To gain access to the fuses in the fuse boxon the dashboard, loosen the fasteningscrews A-fig. 40 and remove the cover.
fig. 41 F0R0126m
F34 F48 F49 F35 F13
F46 F33 F37 F42 F12
F45 F47 F32 F50 F51
F52 F41 F43 F40 F44
F36 F39 F38 F53 F31
fig. 40 F0R0125m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 169
170
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
Fuse box in engine compartmentfig. 43
To gain access to the fuses in the fuse boxnext to the battery, remove the protec-tion cover fig. 42.
fig. 42 F0R0127m
fig. 43 F0R0128m
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 170
171
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
7.5
7.5
7.5
15
20
20
7.5
7.5
7.5
20
10
30
7.5
7.5
20
F12
F13
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35
F36
F37
F38
F39
F40
F41
F42
F43
FUSE TABLE
Fuse box on dashboard fig. 41
LOADS FUSE AMPERES
Right dipped beam headlight
Left dipped beam headlight, headlight corrector
INT/A for relay coils (T08, T17) in engine compartment fuse box and body computer node
Heated Seats
Power windows control unit (left rear window motor)
Power windows control unit (right rear window motor)
+15 reversing lights, brake lights control NC, air mass meter, glow plug pre-heating unit, water in diesel fuel sensor, tachometer generator, level sensor 2
Power window unit (+30 for electronics)
+15 instrument panel, NA brake lights control
Body computer node
Radio node, climate control node, node Blue&Me
Heated rear window
Mirror defrosters
+15 brake system
Windscreen wiper control (two-way pump)
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 171
172
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
LOADS FUSE AMPERES
Cigar lighter or socket
Boot lock actuator
Power window unit (driver’s side front window motor)
Power window unit (passenger’s side front window motor)
+15 control lighting: radio on steering wheel, control panel, power mirrors, power window unit, electrochromic mirror and rain sensor
+15 airbag node
+15 cruise control, radio setup, Blu&Me setup,parking sensors, climate control node
Power window unit, driver’s seat adjustment motor
Body computer and instrument panel node
F44
F45
F47
F48
F49
F50
F51
F52
F53
15
10
20
20
7.5
7.5
7.5
15
7.5
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 172
173
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
10
10
7.5
7.5
10
10
7.5
15
15
20
10
15
F10
F11
F14
F15
F17
F18
F19
F21
F22
F23
F24
F30
Fuse box in engine compartment fig. 43
LOADS FUSE AMPERES
Horn
Engine control system secondary loads
Right main beam headlight
Left beam headlight
Engine control system primary loads
Engine control unit
Conditioner compressor
Fuel pump
Engine control system primary loads (injectors, ignition coils)
Windscreen wiper motor
Spare
Fog lights
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 173
174
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT
IMPORTANT The battery recharging pro-cedure is provided as an example only.You are recommended to go to a FiatDealership to have this operation per-formed.
Low amperage slow recharging for ap-proximately 24 hour is advised. Rapid bat-tery charging with high currents coulddamage the battery.
Charge the battery as follows:
❒ disconnect battery negative terminal;
❒ connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminals, observing the poles;
❒ turn on the charger;
❒ when you have finished, turn the charg-er off before disconnecting the battery;
❒ reconnect battery negative terminal.Battery fluid is poisonousand corrosive: avoid contact
with your skin and eyes. The batteryrecharging operation must be per-formed in a ventilated placed awayfrom naked flames o possible sourcesof sparks to avoid the risk of explo-sion and fire.
WARNING
Never attempt to rechargea frozen battery: defrost it
first to prevent the risk of explosion.If a battery was frozen, have it in-spected by specialised personnel be-fore recharging to check that the in-ternal elements are not damagedand that the casing is not crackedcausing the risk of leakage of poiso-nous, corrosive gas.
WARNING
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 174
175
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
fig. 42 F0R0129m
LIFTING THE CAR
If the car is to be lifted, go to a Fiat Deal-ership which is equipped with the armhoist or workshop lift.
Lift the car exclusively by positioning thejack arms or the shop jack in the pointsshown in the figure.
TOWING THE CARThe tow ring provided with the car ishoused in the tool box under the bootmat.
The front and rear tow hooksshould only be used on the
roads for emergency operations. Tow-ing is permitted for short journies us-ing the special device that conforms tothe highway code (rigid bar) to movethe vehicle onto the road in prepara-tion for towing or transportation ona special vehicle.The hooks should NOT be used for re-covering the vehicle away from theroad or where there are obstaclesand/or for towing using cables or oth-er non rigid devices. With regard to theabove conditions, towing should takeplace with the two vehicles (the onetowing and the one being towed)aligned as closely as possible along thesame centre line axis.
WARNING
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 175
176
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IINDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
FASTENING THE TOW RING fig. 43-44
Proceed as follows:❒ release the cap A;❒ take the tow hook B from the sup-
port;
❒ tighten the ring on the rear or frontthreaded pin.
The power brakes and pow-er steering will not work while
the car is being towed. More effort onthe brake pedal and steering wheel willtherefore be required. Do not use wiresfor towing. Do not jerk. Make sure notto damage parts in contact with thecar while towing. Respect the specificrules of the Highway Code when tow-ing the car specifically in relation tothe towing device and the behaviourto maintain on the road.
WARNING
fig. 43 F0R0130m
fig. 44 F0R0131m
Do not start the engine whiletowing the car.
WARNING
Clean the threaded seatcarefully before fastening
the ring. Make sure that the ring isfully fastened in the seat before tow-ing the car.
WARNING
Release the steering wheellock before towing (see “Ig-
nition device” in “Dashboard and con-trols”).
WARNING
145-176 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:22 Pagina 176
177
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 178
SERVICE SCHEDULE PETROL VERSIONS ............................................................. 179
SERVICE SCHEDULEDIESEL VERSIONS ............................................................... 181
REGULAR INSPECTIONS ................................................. 183
DEMANDING USE OF THE CAR ................................... 183
CHECKING FLUID LEVELS................................................ 184
AIR CLEANER ...................................................................... 190
POLLEN FILTER ................................................................... 190
BATTERY ................................................................................ 190
WHEELS AND TYRES ......................................................... 193
RUBBER HOSES .................................................................... 194
WINDSCREEN WIPERS...................................................... 194
BODYWORK ........................................................................ 196
INTERIORS ............................................................................ 198
CCCCAAAARRRR MMMMAAAAIIIINNNNTTTTEEEENNNNAAAANNNNCCCCEEEE
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 177
178
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
IMPORTANT Scheduled service couponsare required by the manufacturer. Defaultmay cancel the warranty.
Scheduled Servicing is performed by all Fiat Dealership, at pre-established times.
If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for fur-ther replacements or repairs, these maybe carried out only with the explicit agree-ment of the Customer.
IMPORTANT You are advised to contactFiat Dealership in the event of any minoroperating faults, without waiting for thenext service coupon.
If your car is used frequently for towing,the interval between one service couponand the other must be reduced.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance is essential for en-suring long car life under the best condi-tions.
This is why Fiat has planned a series ofchecks and maintenance operations every30,000 km.
Scheduled servicing will not however ful-ly cover all of the need of your car: It ishowever important to remember thatscheduled servicing does not completelycover all the car’s requirements: also inthe initial period before 30,000 km servicecoupon and later, between one couponand another, ordinary care is still requiredsuch as for example routine check andtopping up the level of fluids, tyre pressurecheck, etc.
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 178
183
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
DEMANDING USE OF THE CAR
Should prevailing use of the car be underone of the following specially heavy con-ditions:
❒ trailer or caravan towing;
❒ dusty roads;
❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km) re-peated and with external temperaturesbelow zero;
❒ frequently idling engines or long dis-tance low speed driving (e.g. taxis ordoor-to-door deliveries) or in case ofa long term inactivity;
❒ in cities;
perform the following inspections morefrequently than shown on the ServiceSchedule:
❒ check front disk brake pad conditionsand wear;
❒ check cleanness of locks, bonnet andboot and lever cleanness and lubrica-tion;
❒ visually inspect the conditions of: en-gine, gearbox, transmission, pipes andhoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubberparts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.);
❒ check battery charge and liquid level(electrolyte) (see paragraph “Chargelevel check” in chapter “Maintenanceand care”);
❒ visually inspect the accessory drive beltconditions;
❒ check pollen filter and replace, if re-quired;
❒ check air cleaner and replace, if re-quired.
REGULARINSPECTIONS
Every 1,000 km or before long journeys,check and top up if required:
❒ engine coolant fluid level;
❒ brake fluid level;
❒ brake fluid level;
❒ tyre pressure and conditions.
❒ operation of lights (headlights, directionindicators, hazard lights, etc.);
❒ operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system, position and wear ofthe windscreen and rear window wiperblades;
Every 3,000 km check the following andtop-up, if required:engine oil level.
You are recommended to use FL Selenia products, designed and producedspecifically for Fiat cars (see table “Ca-pacities” in section “Technical specifica-tions”).
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 183
184
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
CHECKING FLUID
fig. 1 - 1.4 version
Never smoke while workingin the engine compartment.
Flammable gases may be present.Risk of fire.
WARNING
Be careful not to confuse thevarious types of fluids whiletopping up: they are all reci-procally incompatible and
may severely damage your car.F0R0243m
1. Engine coolant 2. Battery3. Windscreen washer fluid4. Brake fluid5. Engine oil6. Power steering fluid
fig. 2 - 1.4 T-JET version
2
6 4
5
13
2
6 4
5
13
2
6 4
5
13
F0R0244m
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 184
185
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
fig. 4 - 1.6 Multijet version F0R0301m
fig. 3 - 1.3 Multijet version
1
1
6
2
4 5
3
F0R0235m
1. Engine oil2. Engine coolant
3. Windscreen washer fluid
4. Brake fluid
5. Battery
6. Power steering fluid
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 185
186
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
If the oil level is near or even under theMIN line, add oil through the filler A toreach the MAX line.
Oil level shall never exceed the MAX line.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
The maximum engine oil consumption isusually 400 grams every 1,000 km.
When the car is new, the engine needsto run in, therefore the engine oil con-sumption can only be considered stabilisedafter the first 5,000 - 6,000 km.
IMPORTANT The oil consumption de-pends on driving style and the conditionsunder which the car is used.
IMPORTANT After adding or changingthe oil, let the engine turn over for a fewseconds and wait a few minutes after turn-ing it off before you check the level.
ENGINE OIL fig. 5-6-7-8
Check the oil level a few minutes (about5) after the engine has stopped, with thecar parked on level ground.
The oil level shall be included between theMIN and MAX marks on the dipstick B.
The range between the MIN and MAXlevels corresponds to approximately one litre of oil.
fig. 5 - 1.4 version F0R0134m fig. 7 - 1.3 Multijet version F0R0135m
Proceed very carefully insidethe engine compartment
when the engine is hot: risk of burns.Remember that the fan may start upif the engine is hot: risk of injury. Payattention to scarves, ties and otherloose fitting garments: they could getdragged by the moving parts.
WARNING
fig. 6 - 1.4 T-JET version F0R0245m fig. 8 - 1.6 Multijet version F0R0302m
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 186
187
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
WINDSCREEN WASHINGFLUID fig. 10
To top up, remove the cap A.
Pour a mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35, in the fol-lowing concentrations:
30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 70% water in summer.
50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 and 50% water in winter.
In case of temperatures below –20°C, useundiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 fluid.
ENGINE COOLANT fig. 9
The coolant level must be checked whenthe engine is cold and must be betweenthe MIN and MAX lines on the vessel.
fig. 9 F0R0136m fig. 10
PARAFLU UP antifreeze isused in the engine cooling sys-tem. Use fluid of the sametype contained in the cooling
system for top-ups. PARAFLU UP maynot be mixed with other types of fluids.If this accidentally occurs, do not startthe engine and contact a Fiat Dealer-ship.
The cooling system is pres-surised. If required, replace
the cap with an original spare part soas not to compromise system effi-ciency. Do not remove the cap fromthe vessel when the engine is hot: riskof burns.
WARNING
If the level is low, slowly pour a 50% mix-ture of demineralised water and FL Sele-nia PARAFLU UP through filler A of thevessel until the level approaches the MAXline.
The 50% concentration of PARAFLU UPdemineralised water protects from freez-ing to a temperature of –35°C.
For particularly hard climate conditions, werecommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UPand 40% demineralized water mixture.
Waste engine oil and oil filterscontains substances which aredangerous for the environ-ment. It is advisable to have
oil and filters changed by a Fiat Deal-ership where they will be disposed ofaccording to the law.
Always top up using engine oilof the same types as that al-ready in the engine.
F0R0137m
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 187
188
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
NOTE Carefully clean the cap of reservoirA and the surrounding surface.
When opening the cap, make sure that nodirt gets into the reservoir.
For topping up always use a funnel withbuilt in filter (mesh smaller than or equalto 0.12 mm).
IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs mois-ture. For this reason, if the car is mainlyused in areas with a high degree of at-mospheric humidity, the fluid should bereplaced at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the “Service schedule”.
Check level through the reservoir.
fig. 11 F0R0138m
Do not travel with the wind-screen washing reservoir
empty: the windscreen washer is fun-damental to improve visibility.
WARNING
Some commercial wind-screen washer additives are
flammable. The engine compartmentcontains hot parts which could starta fire if they come into contact.
WARNING
Prevent brake fluid which ishighly corrosive from cominginto contact with paintedparts. Wash with water im-
mediately if this should happen.
BRAKE FLUID fig. 11
Release cap A: check that the liquid con-tained in the tank is at the maximum level.
Fluid level in the reservoir must not ex-ceed the MAX mark.
Use the brake fluid shown in the “Fluidsand lubricants” table (see “Technical Spec-ifications”).
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 188
189
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
Brake fluid is poisonous andhighly corrosive. In the case
of accidental contact, wash the partswith water and mild soap and rinsewith plenty of water. Call a doctorimmediately if swallowed.
WARNING
Symbol π on the contain in-dicates a synthetic brake flu-
id, which is different from a mineralfluid. Use of a mineral type fluid willdamage the special rubber seals ofthe braking system beyond repair.
WARNING
POWER STEERING FLUID fig. 12
Check that the oil level with the car on flatground and the engine cold is between theMIN and MAX lines on the reservoirbody. The level may go over the MAXline when the oil is hot.If topping up is required, make sure the oilyou used has the same specifications asthat already in the system.
fig. 12 - 1.4 T-JET version F0R0139m
Oil consumption is extremelylow; if another top-up shouldbe required after only a short
period of time, have the system checkedfor leakage at a Fiat Dealership.
Prevent power steering flu-id from coming into contact
with hot engine parts: the liquid isflammable.
WARNING
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 189
190
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
BATTERY
The car fits a low-maintenance battery: notop-ups with distilled water are needed innormal conditions of use.
CHECKING THE CHARGE fig. 13
Use the gauge A (where provided) on thebattery lid positioned as shown in fig. 13and take action according to the colour itassumes.
Refer to the table below.
AIR CLEANER
Have the air cleaner replaced by a FiatDealership.
POLLEN FILTER
Have the pollen filter replaced by a FiatDealership.
Brilliant white Top-up Go to a Fiat Dealership
Dark without green Low charge Recharge the battery area in the middle (go to a Fiat Dealership)
Dark with green Electrolyte and charge OK No action needed area in the middle
fig. 13 F0R0140m
IMPORTANT If the battery is not pro-vided with the visual indicator to verifyelectrolyte charge and level, control op-erations and any top-up operation mustbe carried out by specialised personneland by Fiat Dealership.
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 190
191
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
CHANGING THE BATTERY
If required, replace the battery with a gen-uine spare part having the same specifi-cations.If a battery with different specifications isfitted, the service intervals given in the“Service schedule” in this section will nolonger apply.Follow the battery manufacturer’s in-structions for maintenance.IMPORTANT Check the battery chargeonce a year, preferably before the begin-ning to winter, to prevent freezing of theelectrolyte. Perform this inspection morefrequently if the car is mainly used forshort distances or if electrical devices run-ning with the key off are installed, partic-ularly after-market.
Incorrect assembly of electricand electronic devices maycause severe damage to yourcar. Go to a Fiat Dealership if
you want to install accessories (alarms,mobile phone, etc.): they will suggestthe most suitable devices and adviseyou if a higher capacity battery needsto be installed.
Batteries contain very dan-gerous substances for the en-vironment. You are recom-mended to go to a Fiat Deal-
ership to have the battery replacedwhere the old battery will be disposedof respecting both the environment andthe laws in force.
If the car is left for long peri-ods in very cold environ-
ments, remove the battery and store itin a warm place to prevent freezing.
WARNING
Battery liquid is poisonousand corrosive. Avoid contact
with the skin and eyes. Keep nakedflames and sources of sparks awayfrom the battery: risk of fire and ex-plosion.
WARNING
Running the battery with anexcessively low liquid level
will damage the battery beyond re-pair and even cause an explosion.
WARNING
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 191
192
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
The total intake of these systems (facto-ry and after-market) must be less than 0.6mA x Ah (of the battery) as shown in thefollowing table:
Battery Maximumpermissible
loadless consumption
40 Ah 24 mA
50 Ah 30 mA
60 Ah 36 mA
IMPORTANT A battery which is kept ata charge of less than 50% (optical indica-tor with dark colour without green areain the middle) for any length of time willbe damaged by sulphation leading to a re-duction in cranking power.
The battery will also be more at risk offreezing (e.g. already at -10°C). Refer tothe paragraph “Car inactivity” in “Startingand driving” if the car is left parked for along time.
If after buying the car, you want to installelectric accessories which require per-manent electric supply (alarm, etc.) con-tact Fiat Dealership whose qualified per-sonnel, in addition to suggesting the mostsuitable devices, will evaluate the overallelectric absorption, checking whether thecar’s electric system is capable of with-standing the load required, or whether itshould be integrated with a more power-ful battery.
Since these devices continue absorbing en-ergy even when the ignition key is off, theygradually run down the battery.
USEFUL ADVICE FORLENGTHENING THE LIFE OFYOUR BATTERY
To avoid draining your battery and length-en its life, observe the following indica-tions:
❒ when you park the car, ensure thedoors, tailgate and bonnet are closedproperly;
❒ switch off all lights inside the car: thecar is however equipped with a systemwhich switches all internal lights off au-tomatically;
❒ do not keep accessories (e.g. sound sys-tem, hazard lights, etc.) switched on fora long time when the engine is not run-ning;
❒ before performing any operation on theelectrical system, disconnect the bat-tery negative cable;
❒ make sure that battery terminals are al-ways be perfectly tight.
Always wear the proper pro-tective eyewear when work-
ing on the battery or near it.
WARNING
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 192
193
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
WHEELS AND TYRES
Check the pressure of each type, includ-ing the spare, approximately once everytwo weeks and before starting a long jour-ney: this check must be performed withthe tyre rested and cold.
It is normal for pressure to increase whenthe car is used. For the correct tyre in-flation pressure, see “Wheels” in “Tech-nical specifications” section.
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 14:
A normal pressure: evenly worn tread.
B low pressure: tread particularly wornon the edges.
C excessive pressure: tread particularlyworn in the middle.
The tyres must be replaced when thetread is less than 1.6 mm thick. In all cas-es, follow the laws in force in the coun-try where you are driving.
fig. 14 F0R0141m
IMPORTANT NOTES
❒ Avoid braking suddenly, burning startsand violent knocks against the curb,potholes or other obstacles if possible.Long distances on rough roads maydamage the tyres;
❒ check the tyres regularly for cuts on thesides, swelling or irregular tread wear.Go to a Fiat Dealership if required.
❒ do not over load your car: this maycause serious damage to wheels andtyres;
❒ if a tyre is punctured, stop immediate-ly and charge it to avoid damage to thetyre, the rim, suspensions and steeringsystem;
❒ a tyre will age even if it is not usedmuch. Cracks in the tread and on thesidewalls are a sign of ageing. Have thetyres checked by specialised personnelif they have been fitted for longer than6 years. Remember to check the sparewheel very carefully;
❒ In the case of replacement, always fitnew tyres, avoiding those of dubiousorigin;
❒ If a tyre is changed, also change the in-flation valve;
❒ to allow even wear between the frontand rear tyres, it is advisable to changethem over every 10-15 thousand kilo-metres, keeping them on the same sideof the car so as not to reverse the di-rection of rotation.
Remember that the roadholding qualities of your car
also depends on the correct inflationpressure of the tyres.
WARNING
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 193
194
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
WINDSCREEN WIPER
BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part usingspecial products; TUTELA PROFES-SIONAL SC 35 is recommended.
Replace the blades if the rubber edge isdeformed or worn. In all cases, it is ad-visable to replace them approximatelyonce a year.
A few simple precautions can reduce thepossibility of damage to the blades:
❒ make sure that the rubber part is notstuck to the windscreen at sub-zerotemperatures. Use an antifreeze prod-uct to release it if required.
❒ remove the snow from the window:this will avoid overstressing the elec-trical motor in addition to protectingthe blades;
❒ do not operate the windscreen wiperson dry glass.
Driving with worn wiperblades is a serious hazard,
because visibility is reduced in badweather.
WARNING
RUBBER HOSES
Carefully follow the information containedin the “Service schedule” in this sectionfor maintenance of brake system and fuelfeed rubber hoses.
Ozone, high temperatures and prolongedlack of fluid in the system may cause hard-ening and cracking of the hoses, with pos-sible leaks. Careful inspections are there-fore necessary.
Excessively low pressure willcause overheating of the
tyre and may cause severe tyre dam-age.
WARNING
Do not exchange the tyresfrom the left to the right of
the car and vice versa.
WARNING
Do not repaint alloy wheelrims at temperatures higher
than 150°C. The mechanical featuresof the wheels could be compromised.
WARNING
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 194
195
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
Replacing the windscreen wiperblades fig. 15
How to remove the blade:
❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm A fromthe windscreen;
❒ turn blade B 90° around pin C, locat-ed at the end of the wiper arm;
❒ press the blade locking tabs;
❒ remove the blade from pin C.
fig. 15 F0R0236m
SPRAY NOZZLES
Windscreen washer fig. 16
If there is no jet of fluid, firstly check thatthere is fluid in the reservoir: see “Check-ing fluid levels” in this section).
Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary using a needle.
The windscreen jets are directed by ad-justing the angle of the nozzles.
Fluid jets shall be directed at about 1/3
height from the window upper edge.
fig. 16 F0R0143m
How to insert the blade:
❒ insert the blade fastening tabs in thehole on the end of the arm;
❒ refit the arm with the blade on thewindscreen.
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 195
196
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY
Your car is covered by warranty againstperforation due to rust of any original el-ement of the structure or body.
For the general terms of this warranty, re-fer to Fiat Warranty Booklet.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are the fol-lowing:
❒ atmospheric pollution;
❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas, orhot humid climates);
❒ seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also the abra-sive action of wind-borne atmosphericdust and sand and mud and gravel raisedby other cars.
On your car, Fiat implemented the bestmanufacturing technologies to effectivelyprotect the bodywork against corrosion.
These are the most important:
❒ paint products and systems which givethe car particular resistance to corro-sion and abrasion;
❒ use of galvanised (or pre-treated) steelsheets, with high resistance to corro-sion;
❒ spraying the underbody, engine com-partment, wheelhouse internal partsand other parts with highly protectivewax products;
❒ spraying of plastic materials for pro-tective purposes in the most exposedpoints: under the doors, inside themudguard, along the edges, etc.
❒ use of “open” boxed sections to pre-vent condensation and pockets of mois-ture from triggering rust inside.
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 196
197
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
ADVICE FOR PRESERVINGTHE BODYWORK
Paint
Paintwork does not only serve an aes-thetic purpose, but also protects the un-derlying sheet metal.
Touch up abrasions and scratches immedi-ately to prevent the formation of rust. On-ly use genuine spare paint products fortouch-ups (see “Bodywork paint identifi-cation plate” in the “Technical Specifica-tions” section).
Normal maintenance of paintwork consistsin washing the car: the frequency dependson the conditions and environment wherethe car is used. For example, it is advisableto wash the car more often in areas witha high environmental pollution or on roadssprinkled with salt.
To correctly wash the car:
❒ remove the aerial from the roof to pre-vent damage to it if the car is washed inan automatic system;
❒ wash the body using a low pressure jetof water;
❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy so-lution over the bodywork, frequentlyrinsing with the sponge;
❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jetof air or a chamois leather.
Dry the parts less in sight particularly care-fully, such as the door frames and theheadlight frames, where water may stag-nate more easily. It is a good idea to leavethe car in the open for a while after wash-ing it to give time for the water to evap-orate.
Do not wash the car after it has beenparked in the sun or when the engine isbonnet is hot: this could take the shine offthe paint.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned inthe same way as the rest of the car.
Where possible, do not park under trees;the resinous substance many species re-lease give the paint a dull appearance andincrease the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings must bewashed off immediately and thoroughly asthe acid they contain is particularly ag-gressive.
Detergents cause water pollu-tion. The car should be washedin areas equipped for collect-ing and purifying the liquid
used in the washing process.
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 197
198
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
Windows
Use specific window cleaner products.
Use also clean cloths to avoid scratchingthe glass or damaging the transparency.
IMPORTANT The inside of the rear win-dow should be wiped gently with a clothin the direction of the filaments to avoiddamaging the heating device.
Engine compartment
Wash the engine compartment carefullyafter the end of the winter. Be careful notto direct the jet of water onto electroniccontrol units. Adequately protect the up-per air vents to prevent damage to thewindscreen wiper motor. Have this op-eration performed at a specialised work-shop.
IMPORTANT Perform this operation ona cold engine and with the key at STOP.After the washing operation, make surethat the various protections (e.g. rubbercaps and guards) have not removed ordamaged.
Never use flammable prod-ucts, such as petrol ether or
rectified petrol to clean inside the car.The electrostatic charges which aregenerated by rubbing during thecleaning operation may cause a fire.
WARNING
INTERIORS
Periodically check that water is nottrapped under the mats (due to waterdripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.) whichcould cause oxidisation of the sheet metal.
Front headlights
IMPORTANT Never use aromatic sub-stances (e.g.: petrol) or ketenes (e.g.: ace-tone) for cleaning front headlight plasticlens.
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 198
199
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
The fabric upholstery of yourcar is designed to withstandthe normal wear and tear ofyour car for a long time. Some
precautions are however needed. Avoidprolonged rubbing against clothing ac-cessories, such as metal buckles, Velcrostrips and the like, which by applying ahigh pressure on the fabric in a smallarea could cause the breakage of somethreads and damage the upholstery.
CLEANING SEATS AND FABRICPARTS
Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacu-um cleaner. It is advisable to use a moistbrush on velvet upholstery.
Rub the seats with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral de-tergent.
Do not keep aerosol cans inthe car: risk of explosion.
Aerosol cans must not be exposed totemperatures higher than 50°C. Thetemperature may raise well beyondthat figure when the car is left in thesun.
WARNING INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
It is advisable to clean interior parts with amoist cloth and a solution of water and mildsoap. Use specific products for cleaning plas-tic, without solvents and specifically de-signed to prevent damage to the appearanceand colour of the treated parts to removegrease and tough stains.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro-leum to clean the instrument panel.
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 199
200
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
TECHN
ICAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN A
NEM
ERGE
NCY
CAR
MAIN
TENA
NCE
GENUINE LEATHER STEERINGWHEEL/GEAR LEVER KNOB
These components must be cleaned withmild soap and water only.
Never use spirit and/or alcohol basedproducts.
Before using off-the-shelves products de-signed for cleaning car interiors, make surethat they do not contain spirit and/or al-cohol based substances before using them.
If window cleaner accidentally drips ontothe steering wheel or gear lever knob,wipe away immediately and then wash theconcerned area with mild soap and water.
IMPORTANT Be carefully when arranginga steering wheel lock device, where applic-able, to prevent damaging the leather up-holstery by rubbing.
177-200 LINEA 1ed GB 3-09-2008 17:31 Pagina 200
201
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ................................................. 202
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS............... 204
ENGINE .................................................................................. 205
FUEL FEED/IGNITION ....................................................... 206
TRANSMISSION .................................................................. 207
BRAKES ................................................................................... 207
SUSPENSIONS....................................................................... 208
STEERING............................................................................... 208
WHEELS .................................................................................. 209
DIMENSIONS......................................................................... 213
PERFORMANCE ................................................................... 214
WEIGHTS ............................................................................... 215
CAPACITIES........................................................................... 216
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.............................................. 217
FUEL CONSUMPTION....................................................... 219
CO2 EMISSIONS .................................................................. 221
TTTTEEEECCCCHHHHNNNNIIIICCCCAAAALLLL SSSSPPPPEEEECCCCIIIIFFFFIIIICCCCAAAATTTTIIIIOOOONNNNSSSS
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 201
202
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
MODEL PLATE fig. 1
This is applied to the right-hand side of thespare wheel shelf and shows the followingdata:
B Homologation number.
C Vehicle type code.
D Chassis number.
E Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded.
F Maximum vehicle weight fully loadedwith trailer.
G Maximum vehicle weight on front axle.
H Maximum vehicle weight on rear axle.
I Engine type.
L Body version code.
M Spare part code.
N Smoke opacity index (for diesel en-gines).
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Take note of the identification codes. Thefollowing identification codes are printedand shown on the plates:
❒ Model plate.
❒ Chassis marking.
❒ Bodywork paint identification plate.
❒ Engine marking.fig. 1 F0R0247m
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 202
203
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
CHASSIS MARKING fig. 3
This is printed on the passegner com-partment floor bed near the front rightseat.
❒ car model (ZFA 323000);
❒ chassis number.
ENGINE MARKING
Engine marking is stamped on the cylinderblock and includes the model and thechassis number.
BODYWORK PAINTIDENTIFICATION PLATE fig. 2
This plate is applied to the tailgate andshows the following data:
A Paint manufacturer.
B Colour name.
C Fiat colour code.
D Respray and touch up code.
fig. 2 F0R0145m fig. 3 F0R0146m
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 203
204
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS
Versions Engine type code Bodywork version code
1.4 350A1000 323AXA1A 00
1.4 T-JET 198A4000 323AXC1A 03
1.3 Multijet 199A3000 323AXB1A 01
1.6 Multijet 198A3000 323AXF1A 06
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 204
205
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
ENGINE
GENERAL
Engine code
Cycle
Number and layout of cylinders
Piston bore and stroke mm
Total displacement cm3
Compression ratio
Maximum power (EEC) kWHP
corresponding ratio rpm
Maximum torque (EEC) Nmkgm
corresponding ratio rpm
Spark plugs
Fuel
1.4
350A1000
Otto
4 in line
72 x 84
1368
11.1 ± 0.2
5777
6000
11511.73000
NGK ZKR7A-10
Unleaded petrol 95RON
(EN228 Specifications)
1.4 T-JET
198A4000
Otto
4 in line
72,0 x 84,0
1368
9.8
881205000
20621
1750
NGK IKR9F8
Unleaded petrol 95RON
(EN228 Specifications)
1.3 Multijet
199A3000
Diesel
4 in line
69.6 x 82
1248
17.6 ± 0.4
6690
4000
20020.31750
–
Diesel fuel for motorvehicles
(EN590 specifications)
1.6 Multijet
198A3000
Diesel
4 in line
79.5 x 80.5
1598
16.5 ± 0.4
771054000
29029.61500
–
Diesel fuel for motorvehicles
(EN590 specifications)
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 205
206
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
Modifications or repairs to the fuel feed system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’stechnical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.
WARNING
Fuel feedMultipoint electronic injection Multipoint sequential phased
electronic injection with turbosupercharger and intercooler
Multijet direct injection “Common Rail”
FUEL FEED/IGNITION
1.4 - 1.6 - 1.8 1.4 T-JET 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 206
207
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
TRANSMISSION
1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet
Gearbox Five forward gears plus reverse Six forward gears plus reverse with synchronisers for forward gears with synchronisers for forward gears
Clutch Self-adjusting with pedal without idle stroke Self-adjusting with pedal without idle stroke
Drive Front Front
BRAKES
1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet
Service brakes:
– front
– rear
Parking brake
IMPORTANT Water, ice and salt sprinkled on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.
controlled by hand lever, operating on rear brakes
drum / disk (T-JET version and 1.6 Multijet)
disk
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 207
208
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
SUSPENSIONS
1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet
Front
Rear
Mc Pherson independent wheels
twisting axle with interconnected wheels
STEERING
1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet
Type
Steering circle (kerb to kerb) m 10.5 (❏) / 11 (Δ)
(❏) With 15” tyres(Δ) With 16” and 17” tyres
rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 208
209
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
READING TYRE MARKINGS fig. 4
Example: 185/65 R 15 88T
185 = Nominal width (S, distance in mmbetween sidewalls).
65 = Height/width ratio (H/S) in per-centage.
R = Radial tyre.
15 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).
88 = Load rate (capacity).
T = Maximum speed rating.
WHEELS
RIMS AND TYRES
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless ra-dial carcass tyres. All approved tyres arelisted in the Log Book.
IMPORTANT In the event of discrepan-cies between the information provided onthis “Owner’s handbook” and the “Logbook”, consider the specifications shownin the log book only.
Respect the prescribed size to ensuresafety of the car in movement. Fit tyresof the same make and type on all wheels.
IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubeswith Tubeless tyres.
fig. 4 F0R0147m
SPARE WHEEL
Pressed steel rim Tubeless tyre.
WHEEL GEOMETRY
Toe-in total front: 0.3 ± 1 mm
Toe-in total rear: 1.7 ± 0.5 mm
The values refer to the car in running or-der.
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 209
210
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
READING RIM MARKINGS fig. 4
Example: 6J x 15 ET44
6 = rim width in inches 1.
J = rim drop centre outline (sideprojection where the tyre beadrests) 2.
15 = rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) 3 = Ø.
ET44 = wheel camber angle (distance be-tween the disc/rim supportingplane and the wheel rim centreline).
Load rating (capacity)
70 = 335 kg 81 = 462 kg
71 = 345 kg 82 = 475 kg
72 = 355 kg 83 = 487 kg
73 = 365 kg 84 = 500 kg
74 = 375 kg 85 = 515 kg
75 = 387 kg 86 = 530 kg
76 = 400 kg 87 = 545 kg
77 = 412 kg 88 = 560 kg
78 = 425 kg 89 = 580 kg
79 = 437 kg 90 = 600 kg
80 = 450 kg 91 = 615 kg
Maximum speed rating
Q = up to 160 km/h.
R = up to 170 km/h.
S = up to 180 km/h.
T = up to 190 km/h.
?U= up to 200 km/h.
H = up to 210 km/h.
V = up to 240 km/h.
Maximum speed ratingfor snow tyres
QM + S = up to 160 km/h.
TM + S = up to 190 km/h.
HM + S = up to 210 km/h.
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 210
211
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
6J X 15” - ET 44
6J X 15” - ET 44
6J X 15” - ET 44
6J X 15” - ET 44
6J X 15” - ET 44
185/65 R15 84T195/60 R15 88H
185/65 R15 84T (**)
185/65 R15 84T195/60 R15 88H
185/65 R15 84T (**)
185/65 R15 84T (**)
185/65 R15 84T195/60 R15 88H (❏)
195/55 R16 87H (❍)
185/65 R15 84T195/60 R15 88H (❏)
195/55 R16 87H (❍)
205/45 R17 88V (*) (▲)
6J X 15” - ET 44
6J X 16” - ET 41
6J X 15” - ET 44
6J X 16” - ET 41
6.5J X 17” - ET 41
Version Rims Tyres fitted Spare wheel (where provided)Rim Tyre
(❏) Alloy rim
(❍) Optional alloy rim for versions/markets where provided
(*) Not snow chains
(▲)Optional tyre for versions/markets where provided
(**) Using this spare wheel, vehicle max speed is 80 km/h
1.4 T-JET1.3 Multijet1.6 Multijet
1.4
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 211
212
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
Tyre Medium load Full load Front Rear Front Rear
185/65 R15 84T 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3
195/60 R15 88H 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3
195/55 R16 87H 2.3 2.1 2.4 2.4
205/45 R17 88V 2.4 2.2 2.5 2.4
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 212
213
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions are expressed in mm and re-fer to the vehicle fitted with standardtyres.
The height refers to the unladen vehicle.
Boot volume
Unladen boot volume (V.D.A. standards) ...................... 500 dm3
Boot capacity with rear seat folded..................................... 870 dm3
fig. 5 F0R0237m
Versions A B C D E F G H
1.4 - 1.3 Multijet4560 928 2603 1029 1494/1487 (*) 1467/1471 (❏) 1946.21 1482.5/1483.5 (❏)1.4 T-JET
1.6 Multijet
IMPORTANT Track measurements may vary according to rim/tyre size.(*) With lower trim for versions/markets where provided (❏) Full load
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 213
214
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
PERFORMANCE
Top admitted speed after initial car use in km/h.
1.4 1.4 T-JET 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet
165 195 170 190
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 214
215
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
1160
500
10009001660
1200500
75
70
WEIGHTS
Weights (kg) 1.4 1.4 T-JET 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet
Unladen weight (with all liquids, fuel tank filled to 90 % and without optional equipment):
Payload (*) including the driver:
Maximum admitted loads (**)– front axle:– rear axle:– total:
Towable loads– trailer with brakes:– trailer without brakes:
Maximum load on roof:
Maximum load on tow hitch(trailer with brakes):
(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.(**) Loads not be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot and/or on the roof so that they comply
with these limits.
1200
500
10009001670
1200500
75
70
1185
500
10009001685
1200500
75
70
1290
500
10009001790
1200500
75
70
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 215
216
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
CAPACITIES
Fuel tank: litresincluding a reserve of: litres
Fuel tank: litresincluding a reserve of: litres
Cooling system engine: litres
Engine sump: litres Engine sump and filter: litres
Engine sump: litresEngine sump and filter: litres
Gearbox/differential casing: kg
Power steering: kg
Hydraulic brake circuit: kg
Windscreen washer reservoir: litres
(*) Versions with ABS
(❒) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture.
1.6 Multijet
455 ÷ 7
6.3
––
4.34.6
2.0 (❍)
0.9
0.4 / 0.5 (*)
3
1.4T-JET
455 ÷ 7
––
6
2.752.9
––
1.7 (▲)
0.9
0.46 / 0.56 (*)
3
1.3 Multijet
––
455 ÷ 7
7.1
––
3.03.2
1,7 (▲)
0.9
0.4 / 0.5 (*)
3
1.4
455 ÷ 7
––
5.8
2.42.6
––
1.5 (▲)
0.9
0.4 / 0.5 (*)
3
Specified fuels and genuine lubricants
Unleaded petrol with no less than95 R.O.N. (EN 228 Specification)
Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (EN590 Specification)
Mixture of 50% demineralised water and 50% PARAFLU UP (❒)
SELENIA K P.E.
SELENIA WR
TUTELA CAR TECHNYX (▲)TUTELA CAR MATRYX (❍)
TUTELA GI/A
TUTELA TOP 4
Mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 216
217
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
According to Service Schedule
According to Service Schedule
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Genuine fluids and Changingfor correct car operation lubricants frequency
Lubricants forpetrol engines
Lubricants for diesel engines
For diesel engines, in the event of emergencies when genuine products are not available, lubricants providing at least ACEA B4performance are allowed; in that case, engine best performance is not guaranteed; we recommend to have it replaced as soon aspossible with the recommended lubricants by the Fiat Dealership.The use of products with specifications below ACEA A3/B3 standards for petrol engines and ACEA B4 standards for diesel enginescould cause damage to the engine not covered under the warranty.
SAE 5W-40 ACEA A3/B3 grade totally synthetic lubricant. Qualification FIAT 9.55535-M2
Synthetic base lubricants SAE 5W-40 grade. Qualification FIAT 9.55535-N2
SELENIA K Contractual TechnicalReference N° F214.I05
SELENIA WRContractual TechnicalReference N° F515.D06
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 217
218
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
Lubricants and greases for transmission
Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Original fluids and Applicationsfor correct car operation lubricants
(*) IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with fluids having characteristics different from those specified.When the vehicle is used under particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLU UP and demineralised water.
LSynthetic-based oils, grade SAE 75W- 85.Qualification FIAT 9.55550-MX3
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85.Qualification FIAT 9.55550-MX3
Lubricant for automatic transmissions.Qualification FIAT 9.55550-AG1.NLGI 1-2 consistency.Grease containing Molybdenum bisulphide for high temperature appliances. Qualification FIAT 9.55580N.L.G.I. 1-2 consistency
Specifc grease to be used for constant-velocity joints withlow friction coefficient. Qualification FIAT 9.55580N.L.G.I. 0-1 consistency.
Synthetic fluid FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956- 01.Qualification FIAT 9.55597
Protective with antifreeze action, red colour based on inhibited monoethylen glycol and organic formula,that passes CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.Qualification FIAT 9.55523
Additive for diesel fuels with protective action for Diesel engines.
Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants CUNA NC 956-II.Qualification FIAT 9.55522
TUTELA CAR MATRIXContractual TechnicalReference N° F108.F02
TUTELA CARTECHNYXContractual TechnicalReference N° F010.B05
TUTELA GI/AContractual Technical Reference N° F002.B92
TUTELA ALL STARContractual TechnicalReference N° F702.G07
TUTELA STAR 700Contractual TechnicalReference N° F701.C07
TUTELA TOP 4Contractual TechnicalReference N° F001.A93
PARAFLU UPContractual TechnicalReference N° F101.M01
TUTELA DIESEL ARTContractual TechnicalReference N°F601.L06
TUTELA PROFES-SIONAL SC 35Contractual TechnicalReference N° F201.D02
Mechanical gearbox anddifferential (1.3 MultijetDualogic and 1.6 Multijet versions)
Mechanical gearbox and differential (petrol and 1.3 Multijetversions)
Hydraulic power steering
CV joints on wheel side
CV joints on differentialside
Brake and clutch hydraulic controls
Radiator antifreeze proportion: 50% water and50% PARAFLU UP
To be mixed with diesel fuel(25 cc per 10 litres)
To be used diluted orundiluted in windscreen/rear window washer/wiper systems
Brake fluids
Protective agent forradiators
Windscreen/ rearwindow washer fluid
Fuel additivel
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 218
219
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
❒ extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerat-ing in all gears, simulating extraurbanuse of the car: speed varies between 0and 120 km/h;
❒ combined consumption: calculatedweighing about 37% of urban cycle con-sumption and about 63% of extraurbanconsumption.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption figures given in thetable below are determined on the basisof the homologation tests set down byspecific European Directives.
The procedures below are followed formeasuring consumption:
❒ urban cycle: cold starting followed bydriving that simulates urban use of thecar;
IMPORTANT The type of route, trafficsituations, weather conditions, drivingstyle, general conditions of the car, trimlevel/equipment/accessories, load, climatecontrol system, roof rack, other situationsthat affect air drag may lead to differentfuel consumption levels than those mea-sured.
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 219
220
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
Fuel consumption according to Directive 2004/3/EC (litres x 100 km)
Versions Urban Extra-urban Combined
1.4 8.2 5.1 6.3
1.4 T-JET 9.2 5.2 6.7
1.3 Multijet 6.5 4.0 4.9
1.6 Multijet 6.4 4.2 5.0
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 220
221
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
INDE
XDA
SHBO
ARD
AND C
ONTR
OLS
SAFE
TYDE
VICE
SCO
RREC
T USE
OF TH
E CAR
IN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETE
CHNI
CAL
SPEC
IFICA
TIONS
CO2 EMISSIONS
The CO2 emission levels at the exhaust given in the following tables refer to combined consumption.
Versions CO2 emissions according to 2004/3/EC Directive (g/km)
1.4 148
1.4 T-JET 157
1.3 Multijet 129
1.6 Multijet 131
201-221 LINEA 1ed GB 5-09-2008 9:24 Pagina 221
222
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
DASH
BOAR
DAN
D CON
TROL
SSA
FETY
DEVI
CES
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARIN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETEC
HNICA
LSP
ECIFI
CATIO
NSIN
DEX
Boot........................................................ 86– extension ........................................ 87– opening/closing the tailgate......... 86– emergency opening....................... 83
Boot light ............................................... 74Brake assist .......................................... 92Brakes
– fluid level ........................................ 188– technical data ................................ 207
Bulb (replacement)– general instructions ..................... 158– types of bulbs ................................ 158
Capacities ............................................ 106Car inactivity ....................................... 132Car maintenance
– periodical checks........................... 183– scheduled servicing ...................... 178– service schedule ................... 179-181– use of the car under heavy conditions................................ 183
Card box - CD box............................. 72Carrying children safely ..................... 109Ceiling lights.......................................... 72
– boot light ....................................... 66– courtesy ......................................... 66
– front ................................................ 64– puddle/door .................................. 74– rear ................................................. 65
Central console oddmentcompartment ..................................... 71
Chassis (marking) ............................... 203Checking fluid ....................................... 184Child lock .............................................. 83Child restraint systems
– “Universal Isofix” ......................... 114– Passenger’s seat compliance ...... 115
Cigar lighter .......................................... 80Clutch ................................................... 207CO2 emissions...................................... 221Code Card ........................................... 6Consumption
– engine oil ........................................ 186– fuel ................................................... 219
Controls ................................................ 75Correct use of the car ...................... 127Cruise Control..................................... 70Courtesy lights ..................................... 74
– bulb replacement .......................... 174– control button .............................. 74
Current outlet...................................... 73
ABS system.......................................... 92Accessories purchased
by the owner .................................... 100Additional heater ................................. 56Air bag
– front................................................. 115– side .................................................. 118
Air cleaner............................................. 190Adjustable Air vents ........................... 50Alarm...................................................... 11Armrest ................................................. 79Ashtray................................................... 80ASR system ........................................... 95
– activation/deactivation ................. 95At the filling station ............................ 101Automatic climate
control system .................................. 59
Battery– checking the charge ..................... 190– jump starting ................................. 146– recharging ...................................... 185– replacing ......................................... 191
Bodywork– maintenance .................................. 196– version codes ............................... 204
Bonnet .................................................. 88
IIIINNNNDDDDEEEEXXXX
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 222
223
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
DASH
BOAR
DAN
D CON
TROL
SSA
FETY
DEVI
CES
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE V
EHICL
EIN
AN
EMER
GENC
YVE
HICL
EMA
INTE
NANC
ETEC
HNICA
LSP
ECIFI
CATIO
NSIN
DEX
EOBD system ...................................... 96ESP system ............................................ 93External lights ...................................... 66
Fiat CODE system ............................. 6Fix & Go automatic ............................ 153Flashing the headlights ....................... 66Fluid levels ............................................ 184Fluids and lubricants ........................... 217Follow me home (device) ................. 67Front ceiling lights
– bulb replacement........................... 165– control ............................................ 72
Front fog lights– bulb replacement .......................... 162– control button .............................. 75
Fuel– consumption................................... 229– cut-off switch.................................. 77– level gauge....................................... 17
Fuel cut-off switch ............................... 77Fuel filler cap ....................................... 102Fuel level gauge ................................... 17Fuses (replacement) ........................... 168
Gearbox – using manual gearbox .................. 126
Glass holder - can holder................... 72Glove box/oddment compartment.. 78
Handbrake .......................................... 125Hazard lights ........................................ 75Head restraints
– front ................................................ 45– rear ................................................... 46
Headlight washer– control ............................................ 61– fluid level ........................................ 200
Headlights.............................................. 91– beam adjustment .......................... 89– headlight slant adjusting device . 89
Heated rear window ..................... 52-57Heating and ventilation ...................... 49
Identification data .............................. 202Ignition device....................................... 13In an emergency .................................. 145Instrument panel ................................. 14Instruments .......................................... 16Interior fittings .................................... 78Interiors ................................................ 198Isofix (child restraint system) .......... 114
Jack ........................................................ 148Jacking the car ..................................... 175
Key with remote control ................ 8Key without remote control ........... 9
Dashboard ........................................... 5– Left hand drive version ............... 5
Dashboard and controls..................... 4Dead lock device ................................. 77Digital display ....................................... 18Dimensions .......................................... 213Dipped beam headlights
– control ............................................ 66– bulb replacement........................... 161
Direction indicators– control ............................................ 67– front bulb replacement ............... 161– rear bulb replacement ................. 162– side bulb replacement ................. 162
Doors ..................................................... 82
Electrical socket ................................ 73Engine
– identification code ........................ 202– marking ........................................... 203– technical data ................................ 205
Engine compartment– washing ........................................... 197
Engine coolant ...................................... 187Engine coolant temperature gauge .. 17Engine oil
– consumption .................................. 186– level check....................................... 186– specifications ................................. 227
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 223
224
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
DASH
BOAR
DAN
D CON
TROL
SSA
FETY
DEVI
CES
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE C
ARIN
AN
EMER
GENC
YCA
RMA
INTE
NANC
ETEC
HNICA
LSP
ECIFI
CATIO
NSIN
DEX
Pretensioners ...................................... 106Prolonged car inactivity...................... 138Protecting the environment ............. 102Puddle lights .......................................... 74
– bulb replacement .......................... 174
Radio transmitters and cellular telephones ......................................... 100
Radionavigator presetting system .... 104Rain sensor............................................ 69Rear ceiling lights
– bulb replacement........................... 165– control ............................................ 72
Rear doors emergency lock device.......................................... 79
Rear fog lights– bulb replacement .......................... 162– control button .............................. 75
Rear window washer– control ............................................ 61– fluid level ........................................ 200
Rear window wiper– blades .............................................. 207– control ............................................ 61– nozzles ............................................ 208
Rearview mirrors– door mirrors ................................. 47– driving mirror ................................ 48
Reconfigurable Multifunctional Display ................... 32
Refuelling ............................................... 101Rev. counter ......................................... 16Reversing light ..................................... 162Roof rack/ski rack .............................. 90Rubber hoses ....................................... 194
Safety ................................................... 103Seat adjustment ................................... 44Seat belts
– general instructions ..................... 107– load limiters ................................... 106– maintenance .................................. 109– using the seat belts........................ 104
Seats– adjustment ..................................... 44– cleaning ........................................... 199– tilting (rear seats) .......................... 87
Side/taillights– control ............................................ 57– front bulb replacement................. 168– rear bulb replacement .................. 170
Smart washing ..................................... 60Smoker’s kit ......................................... 72Snow chains ......................................... 131Sound system ...................................... 99
Load limiters ...................................... 106
Main beam headlights
– bulb replacement .......................... 161
– control ............................................ 66
– flashing ............................................ 66
Manual climate control system ........ 53
Multifunctional display ........................ 23
Number plate light ............................ 164
Oddment compartments.................. 78
Paint ..................................................... 195
Parking .................................................. 125
Parking sensors .................................... 97
Performance ........................................ 214
Plates
– bodywork paint
identification plate ........................... 203
– model plate .................................... 202
Pollen filter ........................................... 190
Power socket ...................................... 73
Power steering .................................... 96
Power windows .................................. 79
Presetting for mounting the
“Isofix Universal” child restraint system................................. 120
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 224
225
WAR
NING
LIGHT
S AND
MESS
AGES
DASH
BOAR
DAN
D CON
TROL
SSA
FETY
DEVI
CES
CORR
ECT U
SEOF
THE V
EHICL
EIN
AN
EMER
GENC
YVE
HICL
EMA
INTE
NANC
ETEC
HNICA
LSP
ECIFI
CATIO
NSIN
DEX
Towing trailers
– tow hook installation ................... 129
Transmission ........................................ 207
Trip computer ..................................... 42
Tyres
– replacing a wheel ........................... 147
– maintenance .................................. 193
– reading tyre markings .................. 209
– standard tyres ................................ 211
– cold tyre inflation pressure ........ 212
Using the manual gearbox .............. 126
Ventilation .......................................... 49
Warning lights and messages ......... 133
Weights ................................................ 215
Wheel..................................................... 206– replacing a wheel .................. 147-155
– spare wheel ................................... 211
– wheel geometry ............................ 209
Wheel rims
– understanding rim marking ........ 210
Window washing ................................. 68
Window winders ................................. 83
Windscreen/rear window/headlight washer fluid level ............ 200
Windscreen/rear windowwiper blades ...................................... 194
Windscreen washer– control ............................................ 68– fluid level ........................................ 187
Windscreen wiper– blades .............................................. 194– control ............................................ 68– spray nozzles ................................. 195
Spark plugs– type ................................................. 205
Speedometer ....................................... 16Starting and driving ............................ 121Starting the engine
– bump starting ................................ 147– diesel engines ................................ 123– emergency start-up ...................... 146– ignition switch ............................... 13– jump starting .................................. 146– petrol engines ............................... 122– stopping the engine ....................... 124– warm up the engine after just started.......................................... 124
Steering .................................................. 208Steering column lock ......................... 13Steering wheel ..................................... 47Sunroof .................................................. 74Sun visors ............................................. 81Suspensions .......................................... 208Symbols ................................................. 6
Tailgate ................................................ 86Technical specifications ..................... 201Third brake light ................................. 164Top speeds ........................................... 214Towing the car .................................... 175
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 225
PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE
For years now Fiat has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment throughthe continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a viewto guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligationsimposed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Fiat offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* atthe end of its life span without additional costs.
The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of the European Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that thevehicle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.
Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to ourcustomers by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of yournearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Fiat website or call the toll free number 00800 3428 0000.
* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 226
NNNNOOOOTTTTEEEESSSS
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 227
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 228
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 229
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 230
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 231
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Customer Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering - Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)Print N. 603.81.411 - 09/2008 - 2nd Edition
1.4 - 1.4 T-JET - 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet
Tank capacity 45
Reserve 5 ÷ 7
Refuel petrol engines with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no lower than 95 only (EN 228 Specifications)Refuel diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles only (EN 590 Specifications)
FUEL CAPACITIES (litres)
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
Tyre Medium load Full load
Front Rear Front Rear
185/65 R15 84T 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3
195/60 R15 88H 2.3 2.1 2.3 2.3
195/55 R16 87H 2.3 2.1 2.4 2.4
205/45 R17 88V 2.4 2.2 2.5 2.4
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
ENGINE OIL CHANGE1.4 1.4 T-JET 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet
litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg
Engine sump and filter 2,6 – 2,4 2,6 3,2 – 4,6 –
222-232 LINEA 1ed GB 9-09-2008 14:25 Pagina 232